1 | /*===-- clang-c/Index.h - Indexing Public C Interface -------------*- C -*-===*\ |
2 | |* *| |
3 | |* Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM *| |
4 | |* Exceptions. *| |
5 | |* See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information. *| |
6 | |* SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception *| |
7 | |* *| |
8 | |*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*| |
9 | |* *| |
10 | |* This header provides a public interface to a Clang library for extracting *| |
11 | |* high-level symbol information from source files without exposing the full *| |
12 | |* Clang C++ API. *| |
13 | |* *| |
14 | \*===----------------------------------------------------------------------===*/ |
15 | |
16 | #ifndef LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H |
17 | #define LLVM_CLANG_C_INDEX_H |
18 | |
19 | #include "clang-c/BuildSystem.h" |
20 | #include "clang-c/CXDiagnostic.h" |
21 | #include "clang-c/CXErrorCode.h" |
22 | #include "clang-c/CXFile.h" |
23 | #include "clang-c/CXSourceLocation.h" |
24 | #include "clang-c/CXString.h" |
25 | #include "clang-c/ExternC.h" |
26 | #include "clang-c/Platform.h" |
27 | |
28 | /** |
29 | * The version constants for the libclang API. |
30 | * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR should increase when there are API additions. |
31 | * CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is intended for "major" source/ABI breaking changes. |
32 | * |
33 | * The policy about the libclang API was always to keep it source and ABI |
34 | * compatible, thus CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR is expected to remain stable. |
35 | */ |
36 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR 0 |
37 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR 64 |
38 | |
39 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(major, minor) (((major) * 10000) + ((minor) * 1)) |
40 | |
41 | #define CINDEX_VERSION \ |
42 | CINDEX_VERSION_ENCODE(CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR) |
43 | |
44 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) #major "." #minor |
45 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(major, minor) \ |
46 | CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE_(major, minor) |
47 | |
48 | #define CINDEX_VERSION_STRING \ |
49 | CINDEX_VERSION_STRINGIZE(CINDEX_VERSION_MAJOR, CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR) |
50 | |
51 | #ifndef __has_feature |
52 | #define __has_feature(feature) 0 |
53 | #endif |
54 | |
55 | LLVM_CLANG_C_EXTERN_C_BEGIN |
56 | |
57 | /** \defgroup CINDEX libclang: C Interface to Clang |
58 | * |
59 | * The C Interface to Clang provides a relatively small API that exposes |
60 | * facilities for parsing source code into an abstract syntax tree (AST), |
61 | * loading already-parsed ASTs, traversing the AST, associating |
62 | * physical source locations with elements within the AST, and other |
63 | * facilities that support Clang-based development tools. |
64 | * |
65 | * This C interface to Clang will never provide all of the information |
66 | * representation stored in Clang's C++ AST, nor should it: the intent is to |
67 | * maintain an API that is relatively stable from one release to the next, |
68 | * providing only the basic functionality needed to support development tools. |
69 | * |
70 | * To avoid namespace pollution, data types are prefixed with "CX" and |
71 | * functions are prefixed with "clang_". |
72 | * |
73 | * @{ |
74 | */ |
75 | |
76 | /** |
77 | * An "index" that consists of a set of translation units that would |
78 | * typically be linked together into an executable or library. |
79 | */ |
80 | typedef void *CXIndex; |
81 | |
82 | /** |
83 | * An opaque type representing target information for a given translation |
84 | * unit. |
85 | */ |
86 | typedef struct CXTargetInfoImpl *CXTargetInfo; |
87 | |
88 | /** |
89 | * A single translation unit, which resides in an index. |
90 | */ |
91 | typedef struct CXTranslationUnitImpl *CXTranslationUnit; |
92 | |
93 | /** |
94 | * Opaque pointer representing client data that will be passed through |
95 | * to various callbacks and visitors. |
96 | */ |
97 | typedef void *CXClientData; |
98 | |
99 | /** |
100 | * Provides the contents of a file that has not yet been saved to disk. |
101 | * |
102 | * Each CXUnsavedFile instance provides the name of a file on the |
103 | * system along with the current contents of that file that have not |
104 | * yet been saved to disk. |
105 | */ |
106 | struct CXUnsavedFile { |
107 | /** |
108 | * The file whose contents have not yet been saved. |
109 | * |
110 | * This file must already exist in the file system. |
111 | */ |
112 | const char *Filename; |
113 | |
114 | /** |
115 | * A buffer containing the unsaved contents of this file. |
116 | */ |
117 | const char *Contents; |
118 | |
119 | /** |
120 | * The length of the unsaved contents of this buffer. |
121 | */ |
122 | unsigned long Length; |
123 | }; |
124 | |
125 | /** |
126 | * Describes the availability of a particular entity, which indicates |
127 | * whether the use of this entity will result in a warning or error due to |
128 | * it being deprecated or unavailable. |
129 | */ |
130 | enum CXAvailabilityKind { |
131 | /** |
132 | * The entity is available. |
133 | */ |
134 | CXAvailability_Available, |
135 | /** |
136 | * The entity is available, but has been deprecated (and its use is |
137 | * not recommended). |
138 | */ |
139 | CXAvailability_Deprecated, |
140 | /** |
141 | * The entity is not available; any use of it will be an error. |
142 | */ |
143 | CXAvailability_NotAvailable, |
144 | /** |
145 | * The entity is available, but not accessible; any use of it will be |
146 | * an error. |
147 | */ |
148 | CXAvailability_NotAccessible |
149 | }; |
150 | |
151 | /** |
152 | * Describes a version number of the form major.minor.subminor. |
153 | */ |
154 | typedef struct CXVersion { |
155 | /** |
156 | * The major version number, e.g., the '10' in '10.7.3'. A negative |
157 | * value indicates that there is no version number at all. |
158 | */ |
159 | int Major; |
160 | /** |
161 | * The minor version number, e.g., the '7' in '10.7.3'. This value |
162 | * will be negative if no minor version number was provided, e.g., for |
163 | * version '10'. |
164 | */ |
165 | int Minor; |
166 | /** |
167 | * The subminor version number, e.g., the '3' in '10.7.3'. This value |
168 | * will be negative if no minor or subminor version number was provided, |
169 | * e.g., in version '10' or '10.7'. |
170 | */ |
171 | int Subminor; |
172 | } CXVersion; |
173 | |
174 | /** |
175 | * Describes the exception specification of a cursor. |
176 | * |
177 | * A negative value indicates that the cursor is not a function declaration. |
178 | */ |
179 | enum CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind { |
180 | /** |
181 | * The cursor has no exception specification. |
182 | */ |
183 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_None, |
184 | |
185 | /** |
186 | * The cursor has exception specification throw() |
187 | */ |
188 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_DynamicNone, |
189 | |
190 | /** |
191 | * The cursor has exception specification throw(T1, T2) |
192 | */ |
193 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Dynamic, |
194 | |
195 | /** |
196 | * The cursor has exception specification throw(...). |
197 | */ |
198 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_MSAny, |
199 | |
200 | /** |
201 | * The cursor has exception specification basic noexcept. |
202 | */ |
203 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_BasicNoexcept, |
204 | |
205 | /** |
206 | * The cursor has exception specification computed noexcept. |
207 | */ |
208 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_ComputedNoexcept, |
209 | |
210 | /** |
211 | * The exception specification has not yet been evaluated. |
212 | */ |
213 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Unevaluated, |
214 | |
215 | /** |
216 | * The exception specification has not yet been instantiated. |
217 | */ |
218 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Uninstantiated, |
219 | |
220 | /** |
221 | * The exception specification has not been parsed yet. |
222 | */ |
223 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_Unparsed, |
224 | |
225 | /** |
226 | * The cursor has a __declspec(nothrow) exception specification. |
227 | */ |
228 | CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind_NoThrow |
229 | }; |
230 | |
231 | /** |
232 | * Provides a shared context for creating translation units. |
233 | * |
234 | * It provides two options: |
235 | * |
236 | * - excludeDeclarationsFromPCH: When non-zero, allows enumeration of "local" |
237 | * declarations (when loading any new translation units). A "local" declaration |
238 | * is one that belongs in the translation unit itself and not in a precompiled |
239 | * header that was used by the translation unit. If zero, all declarations |
240 | * will be enumerated. |
241 | * |
242 | * Here is an example: |
243 | * |
244 | * \code |
245 | * // excludeDeclsFromPCH = 1, displayDiagnostics=1 |
246 | * Idx = clang_createIndex(1, 1); |
247 | * |
248 | * // IndexTest.pch was produced with the following command: |
249 | * // "clang -x c IndexTest.h -emit-ast -o IndexTest.pch" |
250 | * TU = clang_createTranslationUnit(Idx, "IndexTest.pch"); |
251 | * |
252 | * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.pch' |
253 | * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU), |
254 | * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0); |
255 | * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU); |
256 | * |
257 | * // This will load all the symbols from 'IndexTest.c', excluding symbols |
258 | * // from 'IndexTest.pch'. |
259 | * char *args[] = { "-Xclang", "-include-pch=IndexTest.pch" }; |
260 | * TU = clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(Idx, "IndexTest.c", 2, args, |
261 | * 0, 0); |
262 | * clang_visitChildren(clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(TU), |
263 | * TranslationUnitVisitor, 0); |
264 | * clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU); |
265 | * \endcode |
266 | * |
267 | * This process of creating the 'pch', loading it separately, and using it (via |
268 | * -include-pch) allows 'excludeDeclsFromPCH' to remove redundant callbacks |
269 | * (which gives the indexer the same performance benefit as the compiler). |
270 | */ |
271 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex clang_createIndex(int excludeDeclarationsFromPCH, |
272 | int displayDiagnostics); |
273 | |
274 | /** |
275 | * Destroy the given index. |
276 | * |
277 | * The index must not be destroyed until all of the translation units created |
278 | * within that index have been destroyed. |
279 | */ |
280 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeIndex(CXIndex index); |
281 | |
282 | typedef enum { |
283 | /** |
284 | * Use the default value of an option that may depend on the process |
285 | * environment. |
286 | */ |
287 | CXChoice_Default = 0, |
288 | /** |
289 | * Enable the option. |
290 | */ |
291 | CXChoice_Enabled = 1, |
292 | /** |
293 | * Disable the option. |
294 | */ |
295 | CXChoice_Disabled = 2 |
296 | } CXChoice; |
297 | |
298 | typedef enum { |
299 | /** |
300 | * Used to indicate that no special CXIndex options are needed. |
301 | */ |
302 | CXGlobalOpt_None = 0x0, |
303 | |
304 | /** |
305 | * Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for indexing |
306 | * purposes should use background priority. |
307 | * |
308 | * Affects #clang_indexSourceFile, #clang_indexTranslationUnit, |
309 | * #clang_parseTranslationUnit, #clang_saveTranslationUnit. |
310 | */ |
311 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 0x1, |
312 | |
313 | /** |
314 | * Used to indicate that threads that libclang creates for editing |
315 | * purposes should use background priority. |
316 | * |
317 | * Affects #clang_reparseTranslationUnit, #clang_codeCompleteAt, |
318 | * #clang_annotateTokens |
319 | */ |
320 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing = 0x2, |
321 | |
322 | /** |
323 | * Used to indicate that all threads that libclang creates should use |
324 | * background priority. |
325 | */ |
326 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForAll = |
327 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing | |
328 | CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing |
329 | |
330 | } CXGlobalOptFlags; |
331 | |
332 | /** |
333 | * Index initialization options. |
334 | * |
335 | * 0 is the default value of each member of this struct except for Size. |
336 | * Initialize the struct in one of the following three ways to avoid adapting |
337 | * code each time a new member is added to it: |
338 | * \code |
339 | * CXIndexOptions Opts; |
340 | * memset(&Opts, 0, sizeof(Opts)); |
341 | * Opts.Size = sizeof(CXIndexOptions); |
342 | * \endcode |
343 | * or explicitly initialize the first data member and zero-initialize the rest: |
344 | * \code |
345 | * CXIndexOptions Opts = { sizeof(CXIndexOptions) }; |
346 | * \endcode |
347 | * or to prevent the -Wmissing-field-initializers warning for the above version: |
348 | * \code |
349 | * CXIndexOptions Opts{}; |
350 | * Opts.Size = sizeof(CXIndexOptions); |
351 | * \endcode |
352 | */ |
353 | typedef struct CXIndexOptions { |
354 | /** |
355 | * The size of struct CXIndexOptions used for option versioning. |
356 | * |
357 | * Always initialize this member to sizeof(CXIndexOptions), or assign |
358 | * sizeof(CXIndexOptions) to it right after creating a CXIndexOptions object. |
359 | */ |
360 | unsigned Size; |
361 | /** |
362 | * A CXChoice enumerator that specifies the indexing priority policy. |
363 | * \sa CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing |
364 | */ |
365 | unsigned char ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing; |
366 | /** |
367 | * A CXChoice enumerator that specifies the editing priority policy. |
368 | * \sa CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing |
369 | */ |
370 | unsigned char ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing; |
371 | /** |
372 | * \see clang_createIndex() |
373 | */ |
374 | unsigned ExcludeDeclarationsFromPCH : 1; |
375 | /** |
376 | * \see clang_createIndex() |
377 | */ |
378 | unsigned DisplayDiagnostics : 1; |
379 | /** |
380 | * Store PCH in memory. If zero, PCH are stored in temporary files. |
381 | */ |
382 | unsigned StorePreamblesInMemory : 1; |
383 | unsigned /*Reserved*/ : 13; |
384 | |
385 | /** |
386 | * The path to a directory, in which to store temporary PCH files. If null or |
387 | * empty, the default system temporary directory is used. These PCH files are |
388 | * deleted on clean exit but stay on disk if the program crashes or is killed. |
389 | * |
390 | * This option is ignored if \a StorePreamblesInMemory is non-zero. |
391 | * |
392 | * Libclang does not create the directory at the specified path in the file |
393 | * system. Therefore it must exist, or storing PCH files will fail. |
394 | */ |
395 | const char *PreambleStoragePath; |
396 | /** |
397 | * Specifies a path which will contain log files for certain libclang |
398 | * invocations. A null value implies that libclang invocations are not logged. |
399 | */ |
400 | const char *InvocationEmissionPath; |
401 | } CXIndexOptions; |
402 | |
403 | /** |
404 | * Provides a shared context for creating translation units. |
405 | * |
406 | * Call this function instead of clang_createIndex() if you need to configure |
407 | * the additional options in CXIndexOptions. |
408 | * |
409 | * \returns The created index or null in case of error, such as an unsupported |
410 | * value of options->Size. |
411 | * |
412 | * For example: |
413 | * \code |
414 | * CXIndex createIndex(const char *ApplicationTemporaryPath) { |
415 | * const int ExcludeDeclarationsFromPCH = 1; |
416 | * const int DisplayDiagnostics = 1; |
417 | * CXIndex Idx; |
418 | * #if CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR >= 64 |
419 | * CXIndexOptions Opts; |
420 | * memset(&Opts, 0, sizeof(Opts)); |
421 | * Opts.Size = sizeof(CXIndexOptions); |
422 | * Opts.ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing = 1; |
423 | * Opts.ExcludeDeclarationsFromPCH = ExcludeDeclarationsFromPCH; |
424 | * Opts.DisplayDiagnostics = DisplayDiagnostics; |
425 | * Opts.PreambleStoragePath = ApplicationTemporaryPath; |
426 | * Idx = clang_createIndexWithOptions(&Opts); |
427 | * if (Idx) |
428 | * return Idx; |
429 | * fprintf(stderr, |
430 | * "clang_createIndexWithOptions() failed. " |
431 | * "CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR = %d, sizeof(CXIndexOptions) = %u\n", |
432 | * CINDEX_VERSION_MINOR, Opts.Size); |
433 | * #else |
434 | * (void)ApplicationTemporaryPath; |
435 | * #endif |
436 | * Idx = clang_createIndex(ExcludeDeclarationsFromPCH, DisplayDiagnostics); |
437 | * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions( |
438 | * Idx, clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(Idx) | |
439 | * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing); |
440 | * return Idx; |
441 | * } |
442 | * \endcode |
443 | * |
444 | * \sa clang_createIndex() |
445 | */ |
446 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndex |
447 | clang_createIndexWithOptions(const CXIndexOptions *options); |
448 | |
449 | /** |
450 | * Sets general options associated with a CXIndex. |
451 | * |
452 | * This function is DEPRECATED. Set |
453 | * CXIndexOptions::ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing and/or |
454 | * CXIndexOptions::ThreadBackgroundPriorityForEditing and call |
455 | * clang_createIndexWithOptions() instead. |
456 | * |
457 | * For example: |
458 | * \code |
459 | * CXIndex idx = ...; |
460 | * clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(idx, |
461 | * clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(idx) | |
462 | * CXGlobalOpt_ThreadBackgroundPriorityForIndexing); |
463 | * \endcode |
464 | * |
465 | * \param options A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags. |
466 | */ |
467 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_CXIndex_setGlobalOptions(CXIndex, unsigned options); |
468 | |
469 | /** |
470 | * Gets the general options associated with a CXIndex. |
471 | * |
472 | * This function allows to obtain the final option values used by libclang after |
473 | * specifying the option policies via CXChoice enumerators. |
474 | * |
475 | * \returns A bitmask of options, a bitwise OR of CXGlobalOpt_XXX flags that |
476 | * are associated with the given CXIndex object. |
477 | */ |
478 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXIndex_getGlobalOptions(CXIndex); |
479 | |
480 | /** |
481 | * Sets the invocation emission path option in a CXIndex. |
482 | * |
483 | * This function is DEPRECATED. Set CXIndexOptions::InvocationEmissionPath and |
484 | * call clang_createIndexWithOptions() instead. |
485 | * |
486 | * The invocation emission path specifies a path which will contain log |
487 | * files for certain libclang invocations. A null value (default) implies that |
488 | * libclang invocations are not logged.. |
489 | */ |
490 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void |
491 | clang_CXIndex_setInvocationEmissionPathOption(CXIndex, const char *Path); |
492 | |
493 | /** |
494 | * Determine whether the given header is guarded against |
495 | * multiple inclusions, either with the conventional |
496 | * \#ifndef/\#define/\#endif macro guards or with \#pragma once. |
497 | */ |
498 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFileMultipleIncludeGuarded(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
499 | CXFile file); |
500 | |
501 | /** |
502 | * Retrieve a file handle within the given translation unit. |
503 | * |
504 | * \param tu the translation unit |
505 | * |
506 | * \param file_name the name of the file. |
507 | * |
508 | * \returns the file handle for the named file in the translation unit \p tu, |
509 | * or a NULL file handle if the file was not a part of this translation unit. |
510 | */ |
511 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getFile(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
512 | const char *file_name); |
513 | |
514 | /** |
515 | * Retrieve the buffer associated with the given file. |
516 | * |
517 | * \param tu the translation unit |
518 | * |
519 | * \param file the file for which to retrieve the buffer. |
520 | * |
521 | * \param size [out] if non-NULL, will be set to the size of the buffer. |
522 | * |
523 | * \returns a pointer to the buffer in memory that holds the contents of |
524 | * \p file, or a NULL pointer when the file is not loaded. |
525 | */ |
526 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const char *clang_getFileContents(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
527 | CXFile file, size_t *size); |
528 | |
529 | /** |
530 | * Retrieves the source location associated with a given file/line/column |
531 | * in a particular translation unit. |
532 | */ |
533 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocation(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
534 | CXFile file, unsigned line, |
535 | unsigned column); |
536 | /** |
537 | * Retrieves the source location associated with a given character offset |
538 | * in a particular translation unit. |
539 | */ |
540 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getLocationForOffset(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
541 | CXFile file, |
542 | unsigned offset); |
543 | |
544 | /** |
545 | * Retrieve all ranges that were skipped by the preprocessor. |
546 | * |
547 | * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an |
548 | * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true. |
549 | */ |
550 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList *clang_getSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
551 | CXFile file); |
552 | |
553 | /** |
554 | * Retrieve all ranges from all files that were skipped by the |
555 | * preprocessor. |
556 | * |
557 | * The preprocessor will skip lines when they are surrounded by an |
558 | * if/ifdef/ifndef directive whose condition does not evaluate to true. |
559 | */ |
560 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRangeList * |
561 | clang_getAllSkippedRanges(CXTranslationUnit tu); |
562 | |
563 | /** |
564 | * Determine the number of diagnostics produced for the given |
565 | * translation unit. |
566 | */ |
567 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumDiagnostics(CXTranslationUnit Unit); |
568 | |
569 | /** |
570 | * Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given translation unit. |
571 | * |
572 | * \param Unit the translation unit to query. |
573 | * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve. |
574 | * |
575 | * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed |
576 | * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic(). |
577 | */ |
578 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnostic clang_getDiagnostic(CXTranslationUnit Unit, |
579 | unsigned Index); |
580 | |
581 | /** |
582 | * Retrieve the complete set of diagnostics associated with a |
583 | * translation unit. |
584 | * |
585 | * \param Unit the translation unit to query. |
586 | */ |
587 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXDiagnosticSet |
588 | clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU(CXTranslationUnit Unit); |
589 | |
590 | /** |
591 | * \defgroup CINDEX_TRANSLATION_UNIT Translation unit manipulation |
592 | * |
593 | * The routines in this group provide the ability to create and destroy |
594 | * translation units from files, either by parsing the contents of the files or |
595 | * by reading in a serialized representation of a translation unit. |
596 | * |
597 | * @{ |
598 | */ |
599 | |
600 | /** |
601 | * Get the original translation unit source file name. |
602 | */ |
603 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
604 | clang_getTranslationUnitSpelling(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit); |
605 | |
606 | /** |
607 | * Return the CXTranslationUnit for a given source file and the provided |
608 | * command line arguments one would pass to the compiler. |
609 | * |
610 | * Note: The 'source_filename' argument is optional. If the caller provides a |
611 | * NULL pointer, the name of the source file is expected to reside in the |
612 | * specified command line arguments. |
613 | * |
614 | * Note: When encountered in 'clang_command_line_args', the following options |
615 | * are ignored: |
616 | * |
617 | * '-c' |
618 | * '-emit-ast' |
619 | * '-fsyntax-only' |
620 | * '-o \<output file>' (both '-o' and '\<output file>' are ignored) |
621 | * |
622 | * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be |
623 | * associated. |
624 | * |
625 | * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the |
626 | * source file is included in \p clang_command_line_args. |
627 | * |
628 | * \param num_clang_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in |
629 | * \p clang_command_line_args. |
630 | * |
631 | * \param clang_command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be |
632 | * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process. |
633 | * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation |
634 | * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c', |
635 | * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'. |
636 | * |
637 | * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p |
638 | * unsaved_files. |
639 | * |
640 | * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk |
641 | * but may be required for code completion, including the contents of |
642 | * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by |
643 | * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to |
644 | * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns. |
645 | */ |
646 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile( |
647 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, int num_clang_command_line_args, |
648 | const char *const *clang_command_line_args, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
649 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files); |
650 | |
651 | /** |
652 | * Same as \c clang_createTranslationUnit2, but returns |
653 | * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this |
654 | * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed |
655 | * error codes. |
656 | */ |
657 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit |
658 | clang_createTranslationUnit(CXIndex CIdx, const char *ast_filename); |
659 | |
660 | /** |
661 | * Create a translation unit from an AST file (\c -emit-ast). |
662 | * |
663 | * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created |
664 | * \c CXTranslationUnit. |
665 | * |
666 | * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code. |
667 | */ |
668 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode |
669 | clang_createTranslationUnit2(CXIndex CIdx, const char *ast_filename, |
670 | CXTranslationUnit *out_TU); |
671 | |
672 | /** |
673 | * Flags that control the creation of translation units. |
674 | * |
675 | * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise |
676 | * ORed together to specify which options should be used when |
677 | * constructing the translation unit. |
678 | */ |
679 | enum CXTranslationUnit_Flags { |
680 | /** |
681 | * Used to indicate that no special translation-unit options are |
682 | * needed. |
683 | */ |
684 | CXTranslationUnit_None = 0x0, |
685 | |
686 | /** |
687 | * Used to indicate that the parser should construct a "detailed" |
688 | * preprocessing record, including all macro definitions and instantiations. |
689 | * |
690 | * Constructing a detailed preprocessing record requires more memory |
691 | * and time to parse, since the information contained in the record |
692 | * is usually not retained. However, it can be useful for |
693 | * applications that require more detailed information about the |
694 | * behavior of the preprocessor. |
695 | */ |
696 | CXTranslationUnit_DetailedPreprocessingRecord = 0x01, |
697 | |
698 | /** |
699 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit is incomplete. |
700 | * |
701 | * When a translation unit is considered "incomplete", semantic |
702 | * analysis that is typically performed at the end of the |
703 | * translation unit will be suppressed. For example, this suppresses |
704 | * the completion of tentative declarations in C and of |
705 | * instantiation of implicitly-instantiation function templates in |
706 | * C++. This option is typically used when parsing a header with the |
707 | * intent of producing a precompiled header. |
708 | */ |
709 | CXTranslationUnit_Incomplete = 0x02, |
710 | |
711 | /** |
712 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit should be built with an |
713 | * implicit precompiled header for the preamble. |
714 | * |
715 | * An implicit precompiled header is used as an optimization when a |
716 | * particular translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times |
717 | * when the sources aren't changing that often. In this case, an |
718 | * implicit precompiled header will be built containing all of the |
719 | * initial includes at the top of the main file (what we refer to as |
720 | * the "preamble" of the file). In subsequent parses, if the |
721 | * preamble or the files in it have not changed, \c |
722 | * clang_reparseTranslationUnit() will re-use the implicit |
723 | * precompiled header to improve parsing performance. |
724 | */ |
725 | CXTranslationUnit_PrecompiledPreamble = 0x04, |
726 | |
727 | /** |
728 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit should cache some |
729 | * code-completion results with each reparse of the source file. |
730 | * |
731 | * Caching of code-completion results is a performance optimization that |
732 | * introduces some overhead to reparsing but improves the performance of |
733 | * code-completion operations. |
734 | */ |
735 | CXTranslationUnit_CacheCompletionResults = 0x08, |
736 | |
737 | /** |
738 | * Used to indicate that the translation unit will be serialized with |
739 | * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit. |
740 | * |
741 | * This option is typically used when parsing a header with the intent of |
742 | * producing a precompiled header. |
743 | */ |
744 | CXTranslationUnit_ForSerialization = 0x10, |
745 | |
746 | /** |
747 | * DEPRECATED: Enabled chained precompiled preambles in C++. |
748 | * |
749 | * Note: this is a *temporary* option that is available only while |
750 | * we are testing C++ precompiled preamble support. It is deprecated. |
751 | */ |
752 | CXTranslationUnit_CXXChainedPCH = 0x20, |
753 | |
754 | /** |
755 | * Used to indicate that function/method bodies should be skipped while |
756 | * parsing. |
757 | * |
758 | * This option can be used to search for declarations/definitions while |
759 | * ignoring the usages. |
760 | */ |
761 | CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies = 0x40, |
762 | |
763 | /** |
764 | * Used to indicate that brief documentation comments should be |
765 | * included into the set of code completions returned from this translation |
766 | * unit. |
767 | */ |
768 | = 0x80, |
769 | |
770 | /** |
771 | * Used to indicate that the precompiled preamble should be created on |
772 | * the first parse. Otherwise it will be created on the first reparse. This |
773 | * trades runtime on the first parse (serializing the preamble takes time) for |
774 | * reduced runtime on the second parse (can now reuse the preamble). |
775 | */ |
776 | CXTranslationUnit_CreatePreambleOnFirstParse = 0x100, |
777 | |
778 | /** |
779 | * Do not stop processing when fatal errors are encountered. |
780 | * |
781 | * When fatal errors are encountered while parsing a translation unit, |
782 | * semantic analysis is typically stopped early when compiling code. A common |
783 | * source for fatal errors are unresolvable include files. For the |
784 | * purposes of an IDE, this is undesirable behavior and as much information |
785 | * as possible should be reported. Use this flag to enable this behavior. |
786 | */ |
787 | CXTranslationUnit_KeepGoing = 0x200, |
788 | |
789 | /** |
790 | * Sets the preprocessor in a mode for parsing a single file only. |
791 | */ |
792 | CXTranslationUnit_SingleFileParse = 0x400, |
793 | |
794 | /** |
795 | * Used in combination with CXTranslationUnit_SkipFunctionBodies to |
796 | * constrain the skipping of function bodies to the preamble. |
797 | * |
798 | * The function bodies of the main file are not skipped. |
799 | */ |
800 | CXTranslationUnit_LimitSkipFunctionBodiesToPreamble = 0x800, |
801 | |
802 | /** |
803 | * Used to indicate that attributed types should be included in CXType. |
804 | */ |
805 | CXTranslationUnit_IncludeAttributedTypes = 0x1000, |
806 | |
807 | /** |
808 | * Used to indicate that implicit attributes should be visited. |
809 | */ |
810 | CXTranslationUnit_VisitImplicitAttributes = 0x2000, |
811 | |
812 | /** |
813 | * Used to indicate that non-errors from included files should be ignored. |
814 | * |
815 | * If set, clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU() will not report e.g. warnings from |
816 | * included files anymore. This speeds up clang_getDiagnosticSetFromTU() for |
817 | * the case where these warnings are not of interest, as for an IDE for |
818 | * example, which typically shows only the diagnostics in the main file. |
819 | */ |
820 | CXTranslationUnit_IgnoreNonErrorsFromIncludedFiles = 0x4000, |
821 | |
822 | /** |
823 | * Tells the preprocessor not to skip excluded conditional blocks. |
824 | */ |
825 | CXTranslationUnit_RetainExcludedConditionalBlocks = 0x8000 |
826 | }; |
827 | |
828 | /** |
829 | * Returns the set of flags that is suitable for parsing a translation |
830 | * unit that is being edited. |
831 | * |
832 | * The set of flags returned provide options for \c clang_parseTranslationUnit() |
833 | * to indicate that the translation unit is likely to be reparsed many times, |
834 | * either explicitly (via \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit()) or implicitly |
835 | * (e.g., by code completion (\c clang_codeCompletionAt())). The returned flag |
836 | * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations (e.g., the precompiled |
837 | * preamble) geared toward improving the performance of these routines. The |
838 | * set of optimizations enabled may change from one version to the next. |
839 | */ |
840 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultEditingTranslationUnitOptions(void); |
841 | |
842 | /** |
843 | * Same as \c clang_parseTranslationUnit2, but returns |
844 | * the \c CXTranslationUnit instead of an error code. In case of an error this |
845 | * routine returns a \c NULL \c CXTranslationUnit, without further detailed |
846 | * error codes. |
847 | */ |
848 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_parseTranslationUnit( |
849 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, |
850 | const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args, |
851 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
852 | unsigned options); |
853 | |
854 | /** |
855 | * Parse the given source file and the translation unit corresponding |
856 | * to that file. |
857 | * |
858 | * This routine is the main entry point for the Clang C API, providing the |
859 | * ability to parse a source file into a translation unit that can then be |
860 | * queried by other functions in the API. This routine accepts a set of |
861 | * command-line arguments so that the compilation can be configured in the same |
862 | * way that the compiler is configured on the command line. |
863 | * |
864 | * \param CIdx The index object with which the translation unit will be |
865 | * associated. |
866 | * |
867 | * \param source_filename The name of the source file to load, or NULL if the |
868 | * source file is included in \c command_line_args. |
869 | * |
870 | * \param command_line_args The command-line arguments that would be |
871 | * passed to the \c clang executable if it were being invoked out-of-process. |
872 | * These command-line options will be parsed and will affect how the translation |
873 | * unit is parsed. Note that the following options are ignored: '-c', |
874 | * '-emit-ast', '-fsyntax-only' (which is the default), and '-o \<output file>'. |
875 | * |
876 | * \param num_command_line_args The number of command-line arguments in |
877 | * \c command_line_args. |
878 | * |
879 | * \param unsaved_files the files that have not yet been saved to disk |
880 | * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of |
881 | * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by |
882 | * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to |
883 | * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns. |
884 | * |
885 | * \param num_unsaved_files the number of unsaved file entries in \p |
886 | * unsaved_files. |
887 | * |
888 | * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit |
889 | * is managed but not its compilation. This should be a bitwise OR of the |
890 | * CXTranslationUnit_XXX flags. |
891 | * |
892 | * \param[out] out_TU A non-NULL pointer to store the created |
893 | * \c CXTranslationUnit, describing the parsed code and containing any |
894 | * diagnostics produced by the compiler. |
895 | * |
896 | * \returns Zero on success, otherwise returns an error code. |
897 | */ |
898 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2( |
899 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, |
900 | const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args, |
901 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
902 | unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU); |
903 | |
904 | /** |
905 | * Same as clang_parseTranslationUnit2 but requires a full command line |
906 | * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard |
907 | * library paths are relative to the binary. |
908 | */ |
909 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXErrorCode clang_parseTranslationUnit2FullArgv( |
910 | CXIndex CIdx, const char *source_filename, |
911 | const char *const *command_line_args, int num_command_line_args, |
912 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
913 | unsigned options, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU); |
914 | |
915 | /** |
916 | * Flags that control how translation units are saved. |
917 | * |
918 | * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise |
919 | * ORed together to specify which options should be used when |
920 | * saving the translation unit. |
921 | */ |
922 | enum CXSaveTranslationUnit_Flags { |
923 | /** |
924 | * Used to indicate that no special saving options are needed. |
925 | */ |
926 | CXSaveTranslationUnit_None = 0x0 |
927 | }; |
928 | |
929 | /** |
930 | * Returns the set of flags that is suitable for saving a translation |
931 | * unit. |
932 | * |
933 | * The set of flags returned provide options for |
934 | * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag |
935 | * set contains an unspecified set of options that save translation units with |
936 | * the most commonly-requested data. |
937 | */ |
938 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultSaveOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU); |
939 | |
940 | /** |
941 | * Describes the kind of error that occurred (if any) in a call to |
942 | * \c clang_saveTranslationUnit(). |
943 | */ |
944 | enum CXSaveError { |
945 | /** |
946 | * Indicates that no error occurred while saving a translation unit. |
947 | */ |
948 | CXSaveError_None = 0, |
949 | |
950 | /** |
951 | * Indicates that an unknown error occurred while attempting to save |
952 | * the file. |
953 | * |
954 | * This error typically indicates that file I/O failed when attempting to |
955 | * write the file. |
956 | */ |
957 | CXSaveError_Unknown = 1, |
958 | |
959 | /** |
960 | * Indicates that errors during translation prevented this attempt |
961 | * to save the translation unit. |
962 | * |
963 | * Errors that prevent the translation unit from being saved can be |
964 | * extracted using \c clang_getNumDiagnostics() and \c clang_getDiagnostic(). |
965 | */ |
966 | CXSaveError_TranslationErrors = 2, |
967 | |
968 | /** |
969 | * Indicates that the translation unit to be saved was somehow |
970 | * invalid (e.g., NULL). |
971 | */ |
972 | CXSaveError_InvalidTU = 3 |
973 | }; |
974 | |
975 | /** |
976 | * Saves a translation unit into a serialized representation of |
977 | * that translation unit on disk. |
978 | * |
979 | * Any translation unit that was parsed without error can be saved |
980 | * into a file. The translation unit can then be deserialized into a |
981 | * new \c CXTranslationUnit with \c clang_createTranslationUnit() or, |
982 | * if it is an incomplete translation unit that corresponds to a |
983 | * header, used as a precompiled header when parsing other translation |
984 | * units. |
985 | * |
986 | * \param TU The translation unit to save. |
987 | * |
988 | * \param FileName The file to which the translation unit will be saved. |
989 | * |
990 | * \param options A bitmask of options that affects how the translation unit |
991 | * is saved. This should be a bitwise OR of the |
992 | * CXSaveTranslationUnit_XXX flags. |
993 | * |
994 | * \returns A value that will match one of the enumerators of the CXSaveError |
995 | * enumeration. Zero (CXSaveError_None) indicates that the translation unit was |
996 | * saved successfully, while a non-zero value indicates that a problem occurred. |
997 | */ |
998 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_saveTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU, |
999 | const char *FileName, |
1000 | unsigned options); |
1001 | |
1002 | /** |
1003 | * Suspend a translation unit in order to free memory associated with it. |
1004 | * |
1005 | * A suspended translation unit uses significantly less memory but on the other |
1006 | * side does not support any other calls than \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit |
1007 | * to resume it or \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit to dispose it completely. |
1008 | */ |
1009 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_suspendTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit); |
1010 | |
1011 | /** |
1012 | * Destroy the specified CXTranslationUnit object. |
1013 | */ |
1014 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit); |
1015 | |
1016 | /** |
1017 | * Flags that control the reparsing of translation units. |
1018 | * |
1019 | * The enumerators in this enumeration type are meant to be bitwise |
1020 | * ORed together to specify which options should be used when |
1021 | * reparsing the translation unit. |
1022 | */ |
1023 | enum CXReparse_Flags { |
1024 | /** |
1025 | * Used to indicate that no special reparsing options are needed. |
1026 | */ |
1027 | CXReparse_None = 0x0 |
1028 | }; |
1029 | |
1030 | /** |
1031 | * Returns the set of flags that is suitable for reparsing a translation |
1032 | * unit. |
1033 | * |
1034 | * The set of flags returned provide options for |
1035 | * \c clang_reparseTranslationUnit() by default. The returned flag |
1036 | * set contains an unspecified set of optimizations geared toward common uses |
1037 | * of reparsing. The set of optimizations enabled may change from one version |
1038 | * to the next. |
1039 | */ |
1040 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultReparseOptions(CXTranslationUnit TU); |
1041 | |
1042 | /** |
1043 | * Reparse the source files that produced this translation unit. |
1044 | * |
1045 | * This routine can be used to re-parse the source files that originally |
1046 | * created the given translation unit, for example because those source files |
1047 | * have changed (either on disk or as passed via \p unsaved_files). The |
1048 | * source code will be reparsed with the same command-line options as it |
1049 | * was originally parsed. |
1050 | * |
1051 | * Reparsing a translation unit invalidates all cursors and source locations |
1052 | * that refer into that translation unit. This makes reparsing a translation |
1053 | * unit semantically equivalent to destroying the translation unit and then |
1054 | * creating a new translation unit with the same command-line arguments. |
1055 | * However, it may be more efficient to reparse a translation |
1056 | * unit using this routine. |
1057 | * |
1058 | * \param TU The translation unit whose contents will be re-parsed. The |
1059 | * translation unit must originally have been built with |
1060 | * \c clang_createTranslationUnitFromSourceFile(). |
1061 | * |
1062 | * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p |
1063 | * unsaved_files. |
1064 | * |
1065 | * \param unsaved_files The files that have not yet been saved to disk |
1066 | * but may be required for parsing, including the contents of |
1067 | * those files. The contents and name of these files (as specified by |
1068 | * CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the client only needs to |
1069 | * guarantee their validity until the call to this function returns. |
1070 | * |
1071 | * \param options A bitset of options composed of the flags in CXReparse_Flags. |
1072 | * The function \c clang_defaultReparseOptions() produces a default set of |
1073 | * options recommended for most uses, based on the translation unit. |
1074 | * |
1075 | * \returns 0 if the sources could be reparsed. A non-zero error code will be |
1076 | * returned if reparsing was impossible, such that the translation unit is |
1077 | * invalid. In such cases, the only valid call for \c TU is |
1078 | * \c clang_disposeTranslationUnit(TU). The error codes returned by this |
1079 | * routine are described by the \c CXErrorCode enum. |
1080 | */ |
1081 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int |
1082 | clang_reparseTranslationUnit(CXTranslationUnit TU, unsigned num_unsaved_files, |
1083 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
1084 | unsigned options); |
1085 | |
1086 | /** |
1087 | * Categorizes how memory is being used by a translation unit. |
1088 | */ |
1089 | enum CXTUResourceUsageKind { |
1090 | CXTUResourceUsage_AST = 1, |
1091 | CXTUResourceUsage_Identifiers = 2, |
1092 | CXTUResourceUsage_Selectors = 3, |
1093 | CXTUResourceUsage_GlobalCompletionResults = 4, |
1094 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManagerContentCache = 5, |
1095 | CXTUResourceUsage_AST_SideTables = 6, |
1096 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_Malloc = 7, |
1097 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_Membuffer_MMap = 8, |
1098 | CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_Malloc = 9, |
1099 | CXTUResourceUsage_ExternalASTSource_Membuffer_MMap = 10, |
1100 | CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor = 11, |
1101 | CXTUResourceUsage_PreprocessingRecord = 12, |
1102 | CXTUResourceUsage_SourceManager_DataStructures = 13, |
1103 | = 14, |
1104 | CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_BEGIN = CXTUResourceUsage_AST, |
1105 | CXTUResourceUsage_MEMORY_IN_BYTES_END = |
1106 | CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch, |
1107 | |
1108 | CXTUResourceUsage_First = CXTUResourceUsage_AST, |
1109 | CXTUResourceUsage_Last = CXTUResourceUsage_Preprocessor_HeaderSearch |
1110 | }; |
1111 | |
1112 | /** |
1113 | * Returns the human-readable null-terminated C string that represents |
1114 | * the name of the memory category. This string should never be freed. |
1115 | */ |
1116 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
1117 | const char *clang_getTUResourceUsageName(enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind); |
1118 | |
1119 | typedef struct CXTUResourceUsageEntry { |
1120 | /* The memory usage category. */ |
1121 | enum CXTUResourceUsageKind kind; |
1122 | /* Amount of resources used. |
1123 | The units will depend on the resource kind. */ |
1124 | unsigned long amount; |
1125 | } CXTUResourceUsageEntry; |
1126 | |
1127 | /** |
1128 | * The memory usage of a CXTranslationUnit, broken into categories. |
1129 | */ |
1130 | typedef struct CXTUResourceUsage { |
1131 | /* Private data member, used for queries. */ |
1132 | void *data; |
1133 | |
1134 | /* The number of entries in the 'entries' array. */ |
1135 | unsigned numEntries; |
1136 | |
1137 | /* An array of key-value pairs, representing the breakdown of memory |
1138 | usage. */ |
1139 | CXTUResourceUsageEntry *entries; |
1140 | |
1141 | } CXTUResourceUsage; |
1142 | |
1143 | /** |
1144 | * Return the memory usage of a translation unit. This object |
1145 | * should be released with clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(). |
1146 | */ |
1147 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTUResourceUsage |
1148 | clang_getCXTUResourceUsage(CXTranslationUnit TU); |
1149 | |
1150 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXTUResourceUsage(CXTUResourceUsage usage); |
1151 | |
1152 | /** |
1153 | * Get target information for this translation unit. |
1154 | * |
1155 | * The CXTargetInfo object cannot outlive the CXTranslationUnit object. |
1156 | */ |
1157 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTargetInfo |
1158 | clang_getTranslationUnitTargetInfo(CXTranslationUnit CTUnit); |
1159 | |
1160 | /** |
1161 | * Destroy the CXTargetInfo object. |
1162 | */ |
1163 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_TargetInfo_dispose(CXTargetInfo Info); |
1164 | |
1165 | /** |
1166 | * Get the normalized target triple as a string. |
1167 | * |
1168 | * Returns the empty string in case of any error. |
1169 | */ |
1170 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_TargetInfo_getTriple(CXTargetInfo Info); |
1171 | |
1172 | /** |
1173 | * Get the pointer width of the target in bits. |
1174 | * |
1175 | * Returns -1 in case of error. |
1176 | */ |
1177 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_TargetInfo_getPointerWidth(CXTargetInfo Info); |
1178 | |
1179 | /** |
1180 | * @} |
1181 | */ |
1182 | |
1183 | /** |
1184 | * Describes the kind of entity that a cursor refers to. |
1185 | */ |
1186 | enum CXCursorKind { |
1187 | /* Declarations */ |
1188 | /** |
1189 | * A declaration whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
1190 | * interface. |
1191 | * |
1192 | * Unexposed declarations have the same operations as any other kind |
1193 | * of declaration; one can extract their location information, |
1194 | * spelling, find their definitions, etc. However, the specific kind |
1195 | * of the declaration is not reported. |
1196 | */ |
1197 | CXCursor_UnexposedDecl = 1, |
1198 | /** A C or C++ struct. */ |
1199 | CXCursor_StructDecl = 2, |
1200 | /** A C or C++ union. */ |
1201 | CXCursor_UnionDecl = 3, |
1202 | /** A C++ class. */ |
1203 | CXCursor_ClassDecl = 4, |
1204 | /** An enumeration. */ |
1205 | CXCursor_EnumDecl = 5, |
1206 | /** |
1207 | * A field (in C) or non-static data member (in C++) in a |
1208 | * struct, union, or C++ class. |
1209 | */ |
1210 | CXCursor_FieldDecl = 6, |
1211 | /** An enumerator constant. */ |
1212 | CXCursor_EnumConstantDecl = 7, |
1213 | /** A function. */ |
1214 | CXCursor_FunctionDecl = 8, |
1215 | /** A variable. */ |
1216 | CXCursor_VarDecl = 9, |
1217 | /** A function or method parameter. */ |
1218 | CXCursor_ParmDecl = 10, |
1219 | /** An Objective-C \@interface. */ |
1220 | CXCursor_ObjCInterfaceDecl = 11, |
1221 | /** An Objective-C \@interface for a category. */ |
1222 | CXCursor_ObjCCategoryDecl = 12, |
1223 | /** An Objective-C \@protocol declaration. */ |
1224 | CXCursor_ObjCProtocolDecl = 13, |
1225 | /** An Objective-C \@property declaration. */ |
1226 | CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl = 14, |
1227 | /** An Objective-C instance variable. */ |
1228 | CXCursor_ObjCIvarDecl = 15, |
1229 | /** An Objective-C instance method. */ |
1230 | CXCursor_ObjCInstanceMethodDecl = 16, |
1231 | /** An Objective-C class method. */ |
1232 | CXCursor_ObjCClassMethodDecl = 17, |
1233 | /** An Objective-C \@implementation. */ |
1234 | CXCursor_ObjCImplementationDecl = 18, |
1235 | /** An Objective-C \@implementation for a category. */ |
1236 | CXCursor_ObjCCategoryImplDecl = 19, |
1237 | /** A typedef. */ |
1238 | CXCursor_TypedefDecl = 20, |
1239 | /** A C++ class method. */ |
1240 | CXCursor_CXXMethod = 21, |
1241 | /** A C++ namespace. */ |
1242 | CXCursor_Namespace = 22, |
1243 | /** A linkage specification, e.g. 'extern "C"'. */ |
1244 | CXCursor_LinkageSpec = 23, |
1245 | /** A C++ constructor. */ |
1246 | CXCursor_Constructor = 24, |
1247 | /** A C++ destructor. */ |
1248 | CXCursor_Destructor = 25, |
1249 | /** A C++ conversion function. */ |
1250 | CXCursor_ConversionFunction = 26, |
1251 | /** A C++ template type parameter. */ |
1252 | CXCursor_TemplateTypeParameter = 27, |
1253 | /** A C++ non-type template parameter. */ |
1254 | CXCursor_NonTypeTemplateParameter = 28, |
1255 | /** A C++ template template parameter. */ |
1256 | CXCursor_TemplateTemplateParameter = 29, |
1257 | /** A C++ function template. */ |
1258 | CXCursor_FunctionTemplate = 30, |
1259 | /** A C++ class template. */ |
1260 | CXCursor_ClassTemplate = 31, |
1261 | /** A C++ class template partial specialization. */ |
1262 | CXCursor_ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization = 32, |
1263 | /** A C++ namespace alias declaration. */ |
1264 | CXCursor_NamespaceAlias = 33, |
1265 | /** A C++ using directive. */ |
1266 | CXCursor_UsingDirective = 34, |
1267 | /** A C++ using declaration. */ |
1268 | CXCursor_UsingDeclaration = 35, |
1269 | /** A C++ alias declaration */ |
1270 | CXCursor_TypeAliasDecl = 36, |
1271 | /** An Objective-C \@synthesize definition. */ |
1272 | CXCursor_ObjCSynthesizeDecl = 37, |
1273 | /** An Objective-C \@dynamic definition. */ |
1274 | CXCursor_ObjCDynamicDecl = 38, |
1275 | /** An access specifier. */ |
1276 | CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier = 39, |
1277 | |
1278 | CXCursor_FirstDecl = CXCursor_UnexposedDecl, |
1279 | CXCursor_LastDecl = CXCursor_CXXAccessSpecifier, |
1280 | |
1281 | /* References */ |
1282 | CXCursor_FirstRef = 40, /* Decl references */ |
1283 | CXCursor_ObjCSuperClassRef = 40, |
1284 | CXCursor_ObjCProtocolRef = 41, |
1285 | CXCursor_ObjCClassRef = 42, |
1286 | /** |
1287 | * A reference to a type declaration. |
1288 | * |
1289 | * A type reference occurs anywhere where a type is named but not |
1290 | * declared. For example, given: |
1291 | * |
1292 | * \code |
1293 | * typedef unsigned size_type; |
1294 | * size_type size; |
1295 | * \endcode |
1296 | * |
1297 | * The typedef is a declaration of size_type (CXCursor_TypedefDecl), |
1298 | * while the type of the variable "size" is referenced. The cursor |
1299 | * referenced by the type of size is the typedef for size_type. |
1300 | */ |
1301 | CXCursor_TypeRef = 43, |
1302 | CXCursor_CXXBaseSpecifier = 44, |
1303 | /** |
1304 | * A reference to a class template, function template, template |
1305 | * template parameter, or class template partial specialization. |
1306 | */ |
1307 | CXCursor_TemplateRef = 45, |
1308 | /** |
1309 | * A reference to a namespace or namespace alias. |
1310 | */ |
1311 | CXCursor_NamespaceRef = 46, |
1312 | /** |
1313 | * A reference to a member of a struct, union, or class that occurs in |
1314 | * some non-expression context, e.g., a designated initializer. |
1315 | */ |
1316 | CXCursor_MemberRef = 47, |
1317 | /** |
1318 | * A reference to a labeled statement. |
1319 | * |
1320 | * This cursor kind is used to describe the jump to "start_over" in the |
1321 | * goto statement in the following example: |
1322 | * |
1323 | * \code |
1324 | * start_over: |
1325 | * ++counter; |
1326 | * |
1327 | * goto start_over; |
1328 | * \endcode |
1329 | * |
1330 | * A label reference cursor refers to a label statement. |
1331 | */ |
1332 | CXCursor_LabelRef = 48, |
1333 | |
1334 | /** |
1335 | * A reference to a set of overloaded functions or function templates |
1336 | * that has not yet been resolved to a specific function or function template. |
1337 | * |
1338 | * An overloaded declaration reference cursor occurs in C++ templates where |
1339 | * a dependent name refers to a function. For example: |
1340 | * |
1341 | * \code |
1342 | * template<typename T> void swap(T&, T&); |
1343 | * |
1344 | * struct X { ... }; |
1345 | * void swap(X&, X&); |
1346 | * |
1347 | * template<typename T> |
1348 | * void reverse(T* first, T* last) { |
1349 | * while (first < last - 1) { |
1350 | * swap(*first, *--last); |
1351 | * ++first; |
1352 | * } |
1353 | * } |
1354 | * |
1355 | * struct Y { }; |
1356 | * void swap(Y&, Y&); |
1357 | * \endcode |
1358 | * |
1359 | * Here, the identifier "swap" is associated with an overloaded declaration |
1360 | * reference. In the template definition, "swap" refers to either of the two |
1361 | * "swap" functions declared above, so both results will be available. At |
1362 | * instantiation time, "swap" may also refer to other functions found via |
1363 | * argument-dependent lookup (e.g., the "swap" function at the end of the |
1364 | * example). |
1365 | * |
1366 | * The functions \c clang_getNumOverloadedDecls() and |
1367 | * \c clang_getOverloadedDecl() can be used to retrieve the definitions |
1368 | * referenced by this cursor. |
1369 | */ |
1370 | CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef = 49, |
1371 | |
1372 | /** |
1373 | * A reference to a variable that occurs in some non-expression |
1374 | * context, e.g., a C++ lambda capture list. |
1375 | */ |
1376 | CXCursor_VariableRef = 50, |
1377 | |
1378 | CXCursor_LastRef = CXCursor_VariableRef, |
1379 | |
1380 | /* Error conditions */ |
1381 | CXCursor_FirstInvalid = 70, |
1382 | CXCursor_InvalidFile = 70, |
1383 | CXCursor_NoDeclFound = 71, |
1384 | CXCursor_NotImplemented = 72, |
1385 | CXCursor_InvalidCode = 73, |
1386 | CXCursor_LastInvalid = CXCursor_InvalidCode, |
1387 | |
1388 | /* Expressions */ |
1389 | CXCursor_FirstExpr = 100, |
1390 | |
1391 | /** |
1392 | * An expression whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
1393 | * interface. |
1394 | * |
1395 | * Unexposed expressions have the same operations as any other kind |
1396 | * of expression; one can extract their location information, |
1397 | * spelling, children, etc. However, the specific kind of the |
1398 | * expression is not reported. |
1399 | */ |
1400 | CXCursor_UnexposedExpr = 100, |
1401 | |
1402 | /** |
1403 | * An expression that refers to some value declaration, such |
1404 | * as a function, variable, or enumerator. |
1405 | */ |
1406 | CXCursor_DeclRefExpr = 101, |
1407 | |
1408 | /** |
1409 | * An expression that refers to a member of a struct, union, |
1410 | * class, Objective-C class, etc. |
1411 | */ |
1412 | CXCursor_MemberRefExpr = 102, |
1413 | |
1414 | /** An expression that calls a function. */ |
1415 | CXCursor_CallExpr = 103, |
1416 | |
1417 | /** An expression that sends a message to an Objective-C |
1418 | object or class. */ |
1419 | CXCursor_ObjCMessageExpr = 104, |
1420 | |
1421 | /** An expression that represents a block literal. */ |
1422 | CXCursor_BlockExpr = 105, |
1423 | |
1424 | /** An integer literal. |
1425 | */ |
1426 | CXCursor_IntegerLiteral = 106, |
1427 | |
1428 | /** A floating point number literal. |
1429 | */ |
1430 | CXCursor_FloatingLiteral = 107, |
1431 | |
1432 | /** An imaginary number literal. |
1433 | */ |
1434 | CXCursor_ImaginaryLiteral = 108, |
1435 | |
1436 | /** A string literal. |
1437 | */ |
1438 | CXCursor_StringLiteral = 109, |
1439 | |
1440 | /** A character literal. |
1441 | */ |
1442 | CXCursor_CharacterLiteral = 110, |
1443 | |
1444 | /** A parenthesized expression, e.g. "(1)". |
1445 | * |
1446 | * This AST node is only formed if full location information is requested. |
1447 | */ |
1448 | CXCursor_ParenExpr = 111, |
1449 | |
1450 | /** This represents the unary-expression's (except sizeof and |
1451 | * alignof). |
1452 | */ |
1453 | CXCursor_UnaryOperator = 112, |
1454 | |
1455 | /** [C99 6.5.2.1] Array Subscripting. |
1456 | */ |
1457 | CXCursor_ArraySubscriptExpr = 113, |
1458 | |
1459 | /** A builtin binary operation expression such as "x + y" or |
1460 | * "x <= y". |
1461 | */ |
1462 | CXCursor_BinaryOperator = 114, |
1463 | |
1464 | /** Compound assignment such as "+=". |
1465 | */ |
1466 | CXCursor_CompoundAssignOperator = 115, |
1467 | |
1468 | /** The ?: ternary operator. |
1469 | */ |
1470 | CXCursor_ConditionalOperator = 116, |
1471 | |
1472 | /** An explicit cast in C (C99 6.5.4) or a C-style cast in C++ |
1473 | * (C++ [expr.cast]), which uses the syntax (Type)expr. |
1474 | * |
1475 | * For example: (int)f. |
1476 | */ |
1477 | CXCursor_CStyleCastExpr = 117, |
1478 | |
1479 | /** [C99 6.5.2.5] |
1480 | */ |
1481 | CXCursor_CompoundLiteralExpr = 118, |
1482 | |
1483 | /** Describes an C or C++ initializer list. |
1484 | */ |
1485 | CXCursor_InitListExpr = 119, |
1486 | |
1487 | /** The GNU address of label extension, representing &&label. |
1488 | */ |
1489 | CXCursor_AddrLabelExpr = 120, |
1490 | |
1491 | /** This is the GNU Statement Expression extension: ({int X=4; X;}) |
1492 | */ |
1493 | CXCursor_StmtExpr = 121, |
1494 | |
1495 | /** Represents a C11 generic selection. |
1496 | */ |
1497 | CXCursor_GenericSelectionExpr = 122, |
1498 | |
1499 | /** Implements the GNU __null extension, which is a name for a null |
1500 | * pointer constant that has integral type (e.g., int or long) and is the same |
1501 | * size and alignment as a pointer. |
1502 | * |
1503 | * The __null extension is typically only used by system headers, which define |
1504 | * NULL as __null in C++ rather than using 0 (which is an integer that may not |
1505 | * match the size of a pointer). |
1506 | */ |
1507 | CXCursor_GNUNullExpr = 123, |
1508 | |
1509 | /** C++'s static_cast<> expression. |
1510 | */ |
1511 | CXCursor_CXXStaticCastExpr = 124, |
1512 | |
1513 | /** C++'s dynamic_cast<> expression. |
1514 | */ |
1515 | CXCursor_CXXDynamicCastExpr = 125, |
1516 | |
1517 | /** C++'s reinterpret_cast<> expression. |
1518 | */ |
1519 | CXCursor_CXXReinterpretCastExpr = 126, |
1520 | |
1521 | /** C++'s const_cast<> expression. |
1522 | */ |
1523 | CXCursor_CXXConstCastExpr = 127, |
1524 | |
1525 | /** Represents an explicit C++ type conversion that uses "functional" |
1526 | * notion (C++ [expr.type.conv]). |
1527 | * |
1528 | * Example: |
1529 | * \code |
1530 | * x = int(0.5); |
1531 | * \endcode |
1532 | */ |
1533 | CXCursor_CXXFunctionalCastExpr = 128, |
1534 | |
1535 | /** A C++ typeid expression (C++ [expr.typeid]). |
1536 | */ |
1537 | CXCursor_CXXTypeidExpr = 129, |
1538 | |
1539 | /** [C++ 2.13.5] C++ Boolean Literal. |
1540 | */ |
1541 | CXCursor_CXXBoolLiteralExpr = 130, |
1542 | |
1543 | /** [C++0x 2.14.7] C++ Pointer Literal. |
1544 | */ |
1545 | CXCursor_CXXNullPtrLiteralExpr = 131, |
1546 | |
1547 | /** Represents the "this" expression in C++ |
1548 | */ |
1549 | CXCursor_CXXThisExpr = 132, |
1550 | |
1551 | /** [C++ 15] C++ Throw Expression. |
1552 | * |
1553 | * This handles 'throw' and 'throw' assignment-expression. When |
1554 | * assignment-expression isn't present, Op will be null. |
1555 | */ |
1556 | CXCursor_CXXThrowExpr = 133, |
1557 | |
1558 | /** A new expression for memory allocation and constructor calls, e.g: |
1559 | * "new CXXNewExpr(foo)". |
1560 | */ |
1561 | CXCursor_CXXNewExpr = 134, |
1562 | |
1563 | /** A delete expression for memory deallocation and destructor calls, |
1564 | * e.g. "delete[] pArray". |
1565 | */ |
1566 | CXCursor_CXXDeleteExpr = 135, |
1567 | |
1568 | /** A unary expression. (noexcept, sizeof, or other traits) |
1569 | */ |
1570 | CXCursor_UnaryExpr = 136, |
1571 | |
1572 | /** An Objective-C string literal i.e. @"foo". |
1573 | */ |
1574 | CXCursor_ObjCStringLiteral = 137, |
1575 | |
1576 | /** An Objective-C \@encode expression. |
1577 | */ |
1578 | CXCursor_ObjCEncodeExpr = 138, |
1579 | |
1580 | /** An Objective-C \@selector expression. |
1581 | */ |
1582 | CXCursor_ObjCSelectorExpr = 139, |
1583 | |
1584 | /** An Objective-C \@protocol expression. |
1585 | */ |
1586 | CXCursor_ObjCProtocolExpr = 140, |
1587 | |
1588 | /** An Objective-C "bridged" cast expression, which casts between |
1589 | * Objective-C pointers and C pointers, transferring ownership in the process. |
1590 | * |
1591 | * \code |
1592 | * NSString *str = (__bridge_transfer NSString *)CFCreateString(); |
1593 | * \endcode |
1594 | */ |
1595 | CXCursor_ObjCBridgedCastExpr = 141, |
1596 | |
1597 | /** Represents a C++0x pack expansion that produces a sequence of |
1598 | * expressions. |
1599 | * |
1600 | * A pack expansion expression contains a pattern (which itself is an |
1601 | * expression) followed by an ellipsis. For example: |
1602 | * |
1603 | * \code |
1604 | * template<typename F, typename ...Types> |
1605 | * void forward(F f, Types &&...args) { |
1606 | * f(static_cast<Types&&>(args)...); |
1607 | * } |
1608 | * \endcode |
1609 | */ |
1610 | CXCursor_PackExpansionExpr = 142, |
1611 | |
1612 | /** Represents an expression that computes the length of a parameter |
1613 | * pack. |
1614 | * |
1615 | * \code |
1616 | * template<typename ...Types> |
1617 | * struct count { |
1618 | * static const unsigned value = sizeof...(Types); |
1619 | * }; |
1620 | * \endcode |
1621 | */ |
1622 | CXCursor_SizeOfPackExpr = 143, |
1623 | |
1624 | /* Represents a C++ lambda expression that produces a local function |
1625 | * object. |
1626 | * |
1627 | * \code |
1628 | * void abssort(float *x, unsigned N) { |
1629 | * std::sort(x, x + N, |
1630 | * [](float a, float b) { |
1631 | * return std::abs(a) < std::abs(b); |
1632 | * }); |
1633 | * } |
1634 | * \endcode |
1635 | */ |
1636 | CXCursor_LambdaExpr = 144, |
1637 | |
1638 | /** Objective-c Boolean Literal. |
1639 | */ |
1640 | CXCursor_ObjCBoolLiteralExpr = 145, |
1641 | |
1642 | /** Represents the "self" expression in an Objective-C method. |
1643 | */ |
1644 | CXCursor_ObjCSelfExpr = 146, |
1645 | |
1646 | /** OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.5, Array Section]. |
1647 | * OpenACC 3.3 [2.7.1, Data Specification for Data Clauses (Sub Arrays)] |
1648 | */ |
1649 | CXCursor_ArraySectionExpr = 147, |
1650 | |
1651 | /** Represents an @available(...) check. |
1652 | */ |
1653 | CXCursor_ObjCAvailabilityCheckExpr = 148, |
1654 | |
1655 | /** |
1656 | * Fixed point literal |
1657 | */ |
1658 | CXCursor_FixedPointLiteral = 149, |
1659 | |
1660 | /** OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.4, Array Shaping]. |
1661 | */ |
1662 | CXCursor_OMPArrayShapingExpr = 150, |
1663 | |
1664 | /** |
1665 | * OpenMP 5.0 [2.1.6 Iterators] |
1666 | */ |
1667 | CXCursor_OMPIteratorExpr = 151, |
1668 | |
1669 | /** OpenCL's addrspace_cast<> expression. |
1670 | */ |
1671 | CXCursor_CXXAddrspaceCastExpr = 152, |
1672 | |
1673 | /** |
1674 | * Expression that references a C++20 concept. |
1675 | */ |
1676 | CXCursor_ConceptSpecializationExpr = 153, |
1677 | |
1678 | /** |
1679 | * Expression that references a C++20 requires expression. |
1680 | */ |
1681 | CXCursor_RequiresExpr = 154, |
1682 | |
1683 | /** |
1684 | * Expression that references a C++20 parenthesized list aggregate |
1685 | * initializer. |
1686 | */ |
1687 | CXCursor_CXXParenListInitExpr = 155, |
1688 | |
1689 | /** |
1690 | * Represents a C++26 pack indexing expression. |
1691 | */ |
1692 | CXCursor_PackIndexingExpr = 156, |
1693 | |
1694 | CXCursor_LastExpr = CXCursor_PackIndexingExpr, |
1695 | |
1696 | /* Statements */ |
1697 | CXCursor_FirstStmt = 200, |
1698 | /** |
1699 | * A statement whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
1700 | * interface. |
1701 | * |
1702 | * Unexposed statements have the same operations as any other kind of |
1703 | * statement; one can extract their location information, spelling, |
1704 | * children, etc. However, the specific kind of the statement is not |
1705 | * reported. |
1706 | */ |
1707 | CXCursor_UnexposedStmt = 200, |
1708 | |
1709 | /** A labelled statement in a function. |
1710 | * |
1711 | * This cursor kind is used to describe the "start_over:" label statement in |
1712 | * the following example: |
1713 | * |
1714 | * \code |
1715 | * start_over: |
1716 | * ++counter; |
1717 | * \endcode |
1718 | * |
1719 | */ |
1720 | CXCursor_LabelStmt = 201, |
1721 | |
1722 | /** A group of statements like { stmt stmt }. |
1723 | * |
1724 | * This cursor kind is used to describe compound statements, e.g. function |
1725 | * bodies. |
1726 | */ |
1727 | CXCursor_CompoundStmt = 202, |
1728 | |
1729 | /** A case statement. |
1730 | */ |
1731 | CXCursor_CaseStmt = 203, |
1732 | |
1733 | /** A default statement. |
1734 | */ |
1735 | CXCursor_DefaultStmt = 204, |
1736 | |
1737 | /** An if statement |
1738 | */ |
1739 | CXCursor_IfStmt = 205, |
1740 | |
1741 | /** A switch statement. |
1742 | */ |
1743 | CXCursor_SwitchStmt = 206, |
1744 | |
1745 | /** A while statement. |
1746 | */ |
1747 | CXCursor_WhileStmt = 207, |
1748 | |
1749 | /** A do statement. |
1750 | */ |
1751 | CXCursor_DoStmt = 208, |
1752 | |
1753 | /** A for statement. |
1754 | */ |
1755 | CXCursor_ForStmt = 209, |
1756 | |
1757 | /** A goto statement. |
1758 | */ |
1759 | CXCursor_GotoStmt = 210, |
1760 | |
1761 | /** An indirect goto statement. |
1762 | */ |
1763 | CXCursor_IndirectGotoStmt = 211, |
1764 | |
1765 | /** A continue statement. |
1766 | */ |
1767 | CXCursor_ContinueStmt = 212, |
1768 | |
1769 | /** A break statement. |
1770 | */ |
1771 | CXCursor_BreakStmt = 213, |
1772 | |
1773 | /** A return statement. |
1774 | */ |
1775 | CXCursor_ReturnStmt = 214, |
1776 | |
1777 | /** A GCC inline assembly statement extension. |
1778 | */ |
1779 | CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt = 215, |
1780 | CXCursor_AsmStmt = CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt, |
1781 | |
1782 | /** Objective-C's overall \@try-\@catch-\@finally statement. |
1783 | */ |
1784 | CXCursor_ObjCAtTryStmt = 216, |
1785 | |
1786 | /** Objective-C's \@catch statement. |
1787 | */ |
1788 | CXCursor_ObjCAtCatchStmt = 217, |
1789 | |
1790 | /** Objective-C's \@finally statement. |
1791 | */ |
1792 | CXCursor_ObjCAtFinallyStmt = 218, |
1793 | |
1794 | /** Objective-C's \@throw statement. |
1795 | */ |
1796 | CXCursor_ObjCAtThrowStmt = 219, |
1797 | |
1798 | /** Objective-C's \@synchronized statement. |
1799 | */ |
1800 | CXCursor_ObjCAtSynchronizedStmt = 220, |
1801 | |
1802 | /** Objective-C's autorelease pool statement. |
1803 | */ |
1804 | CXCursor_ObjCAutoreleasePoolStmt = 221, |
1805 | |
1806 | /** Objective-C's collection statement. |
1807 | */ |
1808 | CXCursor_ObjCForCollectionStmt = 222, |
1809 | |
1810 | /** C++'s catch statement. |
1811 | */ |
1812 | CXCursor_CXXCatchStmt = 223, |
1813 | |
1814 | /** C++'s try statement. |
1815 | */ |
1816 | CXCursor_CXXTryStmt = 224, |
1817 | |
1818 | /** C++'s for (* : *) statement. |
1819 | */ |
1820 | CXCursor_CXXForRangeStmt = 225, |
1821 | |
1822 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's try statement. |
1823 | */ |
1824 | CXCursor_SEHTryStmt = 226, |
1825 | |
1826 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's except statement. |
1827 | */ |
1828 | CXCursor_SEHExceptStmt = 227, |
1829 | |
1830 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's finally statement. |
1831 | */ |
1832 | CXCursor_SEHFinallyStmt = 228, |
1833 | |
1834 | /** A MS inline assembly statement extension. |
1835 | */ |
1836 | CXCursor_MSAsmStmt = 229, |
1837 | |
1838 | /** The null statement ";": C99 6.8.3p3. |
1839 | * |
1840 | * This cursor kind is used to describe the null statement. |
1841 | */ |
1842 | CXCursor_NullStmt = 230, |
1843 | |
1844 | /** Adaptor class for mixing declarations with statements and |
1845 | * expressions. |
1846 | */ |
1847 | CXCursor_DeclStmt = 231, |
1848 | |
1849 | /** OpenMP parallel directive. |
1850 | */ |
1851 | CXCursor_OMPParallelDirective = 232, |
1852 | |
1853 | /** OpenMP SIMD directive. |
1854 | */ |
1855 | CXCursor_OMPSimdDirective = 233, |
1856 | |
1857 | /** OpenMP for directive. |
1858 | */ |
1859 | CXCursor_OMPForDirective = 234, |
1860 | |
1861 | /** OpenMP sections directive. |
1862 | */ |
1863 | CXCursor_OMPSectionsDirective = 235, |
1864 | |
1865 | /** OpenMP section directive. |
1866 | */ |
1867 | CXCursor_OMPSectionDirective = 236, |
1868 | |
1869 | /** OpenMP single directive. |
1870 | */ |
1871 | CXCursor_OMPSingleDirective = 237, |
1872 | |
1873 | /** OpenMP parallel for directive. |
1874 | */ |
1875 | CXCursor_OMPParallelForDirective = 238, |
1876 | |
1877 | /** OpenMP parallel sections directive. |
1878 | */ |
1879 | CXCursor_OMPParallelSectionsDirective = 239, |
1880 | |
1881 | /** OpenMP task directive. |
1882 | */ |
1883 | CXCursor_OMPTaskDirective = 240, |
1884 | |
1885 | /** OpenMP master directive. |
1886 | */ |
1887 | CXCursor_OMPMasterDirective = 241, |
1888 | |
1889 | /** OpenMP critical directive. |
1890 | */ |
1891 | CXCursor_OMPCriticalDirective = 242, |
1892 | |
1893 | /** OpenMP taskyield directive. |
1894 | */ |
1895 | CXCursor_OMPTaskyieldDirective = 243, |
1896 | |
1897 | /** OpenMP barrier directive. |
1898 | */ |
1899 | CXCursor_OMPBarrierDirective = 244, |
1900 | |
1901 | /** OpenMP taskwait directive. |
1902 | */ |
1903 | CXCursor_OMPTaskwaitDirective = 245, |
1904 | |
1905 | /** OpenMP flush directive. |
1906 | */ |
1907 | CXCursor_OMPFlushDirective = 246, |
1908 | |
1909 | /** Windows Structured Exception Handling's leave statement. |
1910 | */ |
1911 | CXCursor_SEHLeaveStmt = 247, |
1912 | |
1913 | /** OpenMP ordered directive. |
1914 | */ |
1915 | CXCursor_OMPOrderedDirective = 248, |
1916 | |
1917 | /** OpenMP atomic directive. |
1918 | */ |
1919 | CXCursor_OMPAtomicDirective = 249, |
1920 | |
1921 | /** OpenMP for SIMD directive. |
1922 | */ |
1923 | CXCursor_OMPForSimdDirective = 250, |
1924 | |
1925 | /** OpenMP parallel for SIMD directive. |
1926 | */ |
1927 | CXCursor_OMPParallelForSimdDirective = 251, |
1928 | |
1929 | /** OpenMP target directive. |
1930 | */ |
1931 | CXCursor_OMPTargetDirective = 252, |
1932 | |
1933 | /** OpenMP teams directive. |
1934 | */ |
1935 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDirective = 253, |
1936 | |
1937 | /** OpenMP taskgroup directive. |
1938 | */ |
1939 | CXCursor_OMPTaskgroupDirective = 254, |
1940 | |
1941 | /** OpenMP cancellation point directive. |
1942 | */ |
1943 | CXCursor_OMPCancellationPointDirective = 255, |
1944 | |
1945 | /** OpenMP cancel directive. |
1946 | */ |
1947 | CXCursor_OMPCancelDirective = 256, |
1948 | |
1949 | /** OpenMP target data directive. |
1950 | */ |
1951 | CXCursor_OMPTargetDataDirective = 257, |
1952 | |
1953 | /** OpenMP taskloop directive. |
1954 | */ |
1955 | CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopDirective = 258, |
1956 | |
1957 | /** OpenMP taskloop simd directive. |
1958 | */ |
1959 | CXCursor_OMPTaskLoopSimdDirective = 259, |
1960 | |
1961 | /** OpenMP distribute directive. |
1962 | */ |
1963 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeDirective = 260, |
1964 | |
1965 | /** OpenMP target enter data directive. |
1966 | */ |
1967 | CXCursor_OMPTargetEnterDataDirective = 261, |
1968 | |
1969 | /** OpenMP target exit data directive. |
1970 | */ |
1971 | CXCursor_OMPTargetExitDataDirective = 262, |
1972 | |
1973 | /** OpenMP target parallel directive. |
1974 | */ |
1975 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelDirective = 263, |
1976 | |
1977 | /** OpenMP target parallel for directive. |
1978 | */ |
1979 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForDirective = 264, |
1980 | |
1981 | /** OpenMP target update directive. |
1982 | */ |
1983 | CXCursor_OMPTargetUpdateDirective = 265, |
1984 | |
1985 | /** OpenMP distribute parallel for directive. |
1986 | */ |
1987 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForDirective = 266, |
1988 | |
1989 | /** OpenMP distribute parallel for simd directive. |
1990 | */ |
1991 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 267, |
1992 | |
1993 | /** OpenMP distribute simd directive. |
1994 | */ |
1995 | CXCursor_OMPDistributeSimdDirective = 268, |
1996 | |
1997 | /** OpenMP target parallel for simd directive. |
1998 | */ |
1999 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelForSimdDirective = 269, |
2000 | |
2001 | /** OpenMP target simd directive. |
2002 | */ |
2003 | CXCursor_OMPTargetSimdDirective = 270, |
2004 | |
2005 | /** OpenMP teams distribute directive. |
2006 | */ |
2007 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeDirective = 271, |
2008 | |
2009 | /** OpenMP teams distribute simd directive. |
2010 | */ |
2011 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeSimdDirective = 272, |
2012 | |
2013 | /** OpenMP teams distribute parallel for simd directive. |
2014 | */ |
2015 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 273, |
2016 | |
2017 | /** OpenMP teams distribute parallel for directive. |
2018 | */ |
2019 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective = 274, |
2020 | |
2021 | /** OpenMP target teams directive. |
2022 | */ |
2023 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDirective = 275, |
2024 | |
2025 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute directive. |
2026 | */ |
2027 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeDirective = 276, |
2028 | |
2029 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute parallel for directive. |
2030 | */ |
2031 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeParallelForDirective = 277, |
2032 | |
2033 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute parallel for simd directive. |
2034 | */ |
2035 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeParallelForSimdDirective = 278, |
2036 | |
2037 | /** OpenMP target teams distribute simd directive. |
2038 | */ |
2039 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsDistributeSimdDirective = 279, |
2040 | |
2041 | /** C++2a std::bit_cast expression. |
2042 | */ |
2043 | CXCursor_BuiltinBitCastExpr = 280, |
2044 | |
2045 | /** OpenMP master taskloop directive. |
2046 | */ |
2047 | CXCursor_OMPMasterTaskLoopDirective = 281, |
2048 | |
2049 | /** OpenMP parallel master taskloop directive. |
2050 | */ |
2051 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterTaskLoopDirective = 282, |
2052 | |
2053 | /** OpenMP master taskloop simd directive. |
2054 | */ |
2055 | CXCursor_OMPMasterTaskLoopSimdDirective = 283, |
2056 | |
2057 | /** OpenMP parallel master taskloop simd directive. |
2058 | */ |
2059 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterTaskLoopSimdDirective = 284, |
2060 | |
2061 | /** OpenMP parallel master directive. |
2062 | */ |
2063 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMasterDirective = 285, |
2064 | |
2065 | /** OpenMP depobj directive. |
2066 | */ |
2067 | CXCursor_OMPDepobjDirective = 286, |
2068 | |
2069 | /** OpenMP scan directive. |
2070 | */ |
2071 | CXCursor_OMPScanDirective = 287, |
2072 | |
2073 | /** OpenMP tile directive. |
2074 | */ |
2075 | CXCursor_OMPTileDirective = 288, |
2076 | |
2077 | /** OpenMP canonical loop. |
2078 | */ |
2079 | CXCursor_OMPCanonicalLoop = 289, |
2080 | |
2081 | /** OpenMP interop directive. |
2082 | */ |
2083 | CXCursor_OMPInteropDirective = 290, |
2084 | |
2085 | /** OpenMP dispatch directive. |
2086 | */ |
2087 | CXCursor_OMPDispatchDirective = 291, |
2088 | |
2089 | /** OpenMP masked directive. |
2090 | */ |
2091 | CXCursor_OMPMaskedDirective = 292, |
2092 | |
2093 | /** OpenMP unroll directive. |
2094 | */ |
2095 | CXCursor_OMPUnrollDirective = 293, |
2096 | |
2097 | /** OpenMP metadirective directive. |
2098 | */ |
2099 | CXCursor_OMPMetaDirective = 294, |
2100 | |
2101 | /** OpenMP loop directive. |
2102 | */ |
2103 | CXCursor_OMPGenericLoopDirective = 295, |
2104 | |
2105 | /** OpenMP teams loop directive. |
2106 | */ |
2107 | CXCursor_OMPTeamsGenericLoopDirective = 296, |
2108 | |
2109 | /** OpenMP target teams loop directive. |
2110 | */ |
2111 | CXCursor_OMPTargetTeamsGenericLoopDirective = 297, |
2112 | |
2113 | /** OpenMP parallel loop directive. |
2114 | */ |
2115 | CXCursor_OMPParallelGenericLoopDirective = 298, |
2116 | |
2117 | /** OpenMP target parallel loop directive. |
2118 | */ |
2119 | CXCursor_OMPTargetParallelGenericLoopDirective = 299, |
2120 | |
2121 | /** OpenMP parallel masked directive. |
2122 | */ |
2123 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMaskedDirective = 300, |
2124 | |
2125 | /** OpenMP masked taskloop directive. |
2126 | */ |
2127 | CXCursor_OMPMaskedTaskLoopDirective = 301, |
2128 | |
2129 | /** OpenMP masked taskloop simd directive. |
2130 | */ |
2131 | CXCursor_OMPMaskedTaskLoopSimdDirective = 302, |
2132 | |
2133 | /** OpenMP parallel masked taskloop directive. |
2134 | */ |
2135 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMaskedTaskLoopDirective = 303, |
2136 | |
2137 | /** OpenMP parallel masked taskloop simd directive. |
2138 | */ |
2139 | CXCursor_OMPParallelMaskedTaskLoopSimdDirective = 304, |
2140 | |
2141 | /** OpenMP error directive. |
2142 | */ |
2143 | CXCursor_OMPErrorDirective = 305, |
2144 | |
2145 | /** OpenMP scope directive. |
2146 | */ |
2147 | CXCursor_OMPScopeDirective = 306, |
2148 | |
2149 | /** OpenMP reverse directive. |
2150 | */ |
2151 | CXCursor_OMPReverseDirective = 307, |
2152 | |
2153 | /** OpenMP interchange directive. |
2154 | */ |
2155 | CXCursor_OMPInterchangeDirective = 308, |
2156 | |
2157 | /** OpenMP assume directive. |
2158 | */ |
2159 | CXCursor_OMPAssumeDirective = 309, |
2160 | |
2161 | /** OpenMP assume directive. |
2162 | */ |
2163 | CXCursor_OMPStripeDirective = 310, |
2164 | |
2165 | /** OpenACC Compute Construct. |
2166 | */ |
2167 | CXCursor_OpenACCComputeConstruct = 320, |
2168 | |
2169 | /** OpenACC Loop Construct. |
2170 | */ |
2171 | CXCursor_OpenACCLoopConstruct = 321, |
2172 | |
2173 | /** OpenACC Combined Constructs. |
2174 | */ |
2175 | CXCursor_OpenACCCombinedConstruct = 322, |
2176 | |
2177 | /** OpenACC data Construct. |
2178 | */ |
2179 | CXCursor_OpenACCDataConstruct = 323, |
2180 | |
2181 | /** OpenACC enter data Construct. |
2182 | */ |
2183 | CXCursor_OpenACCEnterDataConstruct = 324, |
2184 | |
2185 | /** OpenACC exit data Construct. |
2186 | */ |
2187 | CXCursor_OpenACCExitDataConstruct = 325, |
2188 | |
2189 | /** OpenACC host_data Construct. |
2190 | */ |
2191 | CXCursor_OpenACCHostDataConstruct = 326, |
2192 | |
2193 | /** OpenACC wait Construct. |
2194 | */ |
2195 | CXCursor_OpenACCWaitConstruct = 327, |
2196 | |
2197 | /** OpenACC init Construct. |
2198 | */ |
2199 | CXCursor_OpenACCInitConstruct = 328, |
2200 | |
2201 | /** OpenACC shutdown Construct. |
2202 | */ |
2203 | CXCursor_OpenACCShutdownConstruct = 329, |
2204 | |
2205 | /** OpenACC set Construct. |
2206 | */ |
2207 | CXCursor_OpenACCSetConstruct = 330, |
2208 | |
2209 | /** OpenACC update Construct. |
2210 | */ |
2211 | CXCursor_OpenACCUpdateConstruct = 331, |
2212 | |
2213 | /** OpenACC atomic Construct. |
2214 | */ |
2215 | CXCursor_OpenACCAtomicConstruct = 332, |
2216 | |
2217 | /** OpenACC cache Construct. |
2218 | */ |
2219 | CXCursor_OpenACCCacheConstruct = 333, |
2220 | |
2221 | CXCursor_LastStmt = CXCursor_OpenACCCacheConstruct, |
2222 | |
2223 | /** |
2224 | * Cursor that represents the translation unit itself. |
2225 | * |
2226 | * The translation unit cursor exists primarily to act as the root |
2227 | * cursor for traversing the contents of a translation unit. |
2228 | */ |
2229 | CXCursor_TranslationUnit = 350, |
2230 | |
2231 | /* Attributes */ |
2232 | CXCursor_FirstAttr = 400, |
2233 | /** |
2234 | * An attribute whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
2235 | * interface. |
2236 | */ |
2237 | CXCursor_UnexposedAttr = 400, |
2238 | |
2239 | CXCursor_IBActionAttr = 401, |
2240 | CXCursor_IBOutletAttr = 402, |
2241 | CXCursor_IBOutletCollectionAttr = 403, |
2242 | CXCursor_CXXFinalAttr = 404, |
2243 | CXCursor_CXXOverrideAttr = 405, |
2244 | CXCursor_AnnotateAttr = 406, |
2245 | CXCursor_AsmLabelAttr = 407, |
2246 | CXCursor_PackedAttr = 408, |
2247 | CXCursor_PureAttr = 409, |
2248 | CXCursor_ConstAttr = 410, |
2249 | CXCursor_NoDuplicateAttr = 411, |
2250 | CXCursor_CUDAConstantAttr = 412, |
2251 | CXCursor_CUDADeviceAttr = 413, |
2252 | CXCursor_CUDAGlobalAttr = 414, |
2253 | CXCursor_CUDAHostAttr = 415, |
2254 | CXCursor_CUDASharedAttr = 416, |
2255 | CXCursor_VisibilityAttr = 417, |
2256 | CXCursor_DLLExport = 418, |
2257 | CXCursor_DLLImport = 419, |
2258 | CXCursor_NSReturnsRetained = 420, |
2259 | CXCursor_NSReturnsNotRetained = 421, |
2260 | CXCursor_NSReturnsAutoreleased = 422, |
2261 | CXCursor_NSConsumesSelf = 423, |
2262 | CXCursor_NSConsumed = 424, |
2263 | CXCursor_ObjCException = 425, |
2264 | CXCursor_ObjCNSObject = 426, |
2265 | CXCursor_ObjCIndependentClass = 427, |
2266 | CXCursor_ObjCPreciseLifetime = 428, |
2267 | CXCursor_ObjCReturnsInnerPointer = 429, |
2268 | CXCursor_ObjCRequiresSuper = 430, |
2269 | CXCursor_ObjCRootClass = 431, |
2270 | CXCursor_ObjCSubclassingRestricted = 432, |
2271 | CXCursor_ObjCExplicitProtocolImpl = 433, |
2272 | CXCursor_ObjCDesignatedInitializer = 434, |
2273 | CXCursor_ObjCRuntimeVisible = 435, |
2274 | CXCursor_ObjCBoxable = 436, |
2275 | CXCursor_FlagEnum = 437, |
2276 | CXCursor_ConvergentAttr = 438, |
2277 | CXCursor_WarnUnusedAttr = 439, |
2278 | CXCursor_WarnUnusedResultAttr = 440, |
2279 | CXCursor_AlignedAttr = 441, |
2280 | CXCursor_LastAttr = CXCursor_AlignedAttr, |
2281 | |
2282 | /* Preprocessing */ |
2283 | CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective = 500, |
2284 | CXCursor_MacroDefinition = 501, |
2285 | CXCursor_MacroExpansion = 502, |
2286 | CXCursor_MacroInstantiation = CXCursor_MacroExpansion, |
2287 | CXCursor_InclusionDirective = 503, |
2288 | CXCursor_FirstPreprocessing = CXCursor_PreprocessingDirective, |
2289 | CXCursor_LastPreprocessing = CXCursor_InclusionDirective, |
2290 | |
2291 | /* Extra Declarations */ |
2292 | /** |
2293 | * A module import declaration. |
2294 | */ |
2295 | CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl = 600, |
2296 | CXCursor_TypeAliasTemplateDecl = 601, |
2297 | /** |
2298 | * A static_assert or _Static_assert node |
2299 | */ |
2300 | CXCursor_StaticAssert = 602, |
2301 | /** |
2302 | * a friend declaration. |
2303 | */ |
2304 | CXCursor_FriendDecl = 603, |
2305 | /** |
2306 | * a concept declaration. |
2307 | */ |
2308 | CXCursor_ConceptDecl = 604, |
2309 | |
2310 | = CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl, |
2311 | = CXCursor_ConceptDecl, |
2312 | |
2313 | /** |
2314 | * A code completion overload candidate. |
2315 | */ |
2316 | CXCursor_OverloadCandidate = 700 |
2317 | }; |
2318 | |
2319 | /** |
2320 | * A cursor representing some element in the abstract syntax tree for |
2321 | * a translation unit. |
2322 | * |
2323 | * The cursor abstraction unifies the different kinds of entities in a |
2324 | * program--declaration, statements, expressions, references to declarations, |
2325 | * etc.--under a single "cursor" abstraction with a common set of operations. |
2326 | * Common operation for a cursor include: getting the physical location in |
2327 | * a source file where the cursor points, getting the name associated with a |
2328 | * cursor, and retrieving cursors for any child nodes of a particular cursor. |
2329 | * |
2330 | * Cursors can be produced in two specific ways. |
2331 | * clang_getTranslationUnitCursor() produces a cursor for a translation unit, |
2332 | * from which one can use clang_visitChildren() to explore the rest of the |
2333 | * translation unit. clang_getCursor() maps from a physical source location |
2334 | * to the entity that resides at that location, allowing one to map from the |
2335 | * source code into the AST. |
2336 | */ |
2337 | typedef struct { |
2338 | enum CXCursorKind kind; |
2339 | int xdata; |
2340 | const void *data[3]; |
2341 | } CXCursor; |
2342 | |
2343 | /** |
2344 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_MANIP Cursor manipulations |
2345 | * |
2346 | * @{ |
2347 | */ |
2348 | |
2349 | /** |
2350 | * Retrieve the NULL cursor, which represents no entity. |
2351 | */ |
2352 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getNullCursor(void); |
2353 | |
2354 | /** |
2355 | * Retrieve the cursor that represents the given translation unit. |
2356 | * |
2357 | * The translation unit cursor can be used to start traversing the |
2358 | * various declarations within the given translation unit. |
2359 | */ |
2360 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTranslationUnitCursor(CXTranslationUnit); |
2361 | |
2362 | /** |
2363 | * Determine whether two cursors are equivalent. |
2364 | */ |
2365 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalCursors(CXCursor, CXCursor); |
2366 | |
2367 | /** |
2368 | * Returns non-zero if \p cursor is null. |
2369 | */ |
2370 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isNull(CXCursor cursor); |
2371 | |
2372 | /** |
2373 | * Compute a hash value for the given cursor. |
2374 | */ |
2375 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_hashCursor(CXCursor); |
2376 | |
2377 | /** |
2378 | * Retrieve the kind of the given cursor. |
2379 | */ |
2380 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getCursorKind(CXCursor); |
2381 | |
2382 | /** |
2383 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a declaration. |
2384 | */ |
2385 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isDeclaration(enum CXCursorKind); |
2386 | |
2387 | /** |
2388 | * Determine whether the given declaration is invalid. |
2389 | * |
2390 | * A declaration is invalid if it could not be parsed successfully. |
2391 | * |
2392 | * \returns non-zero if the cursor represents a declaration and it is |
2393 | * invalid, otherwise NULL. |
2394 | */ |
2395 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalidDeclaration(CXCursor); |
2396 | |
2397 | /** |
2398 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a simple |
2399 | * reference. |
2400 | * |
2401 | * Note that other kinds of cursors (such as expressions) can also refer to |
2402 | * other cursors. Use clang_getCursorReferenced() to determine whether a |
2403 | * particular cursor refers to another entity. |
2404 | */ |
2405 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isReference(enum CXCursorKind); |
2406 | |
2407 | /** |
2408 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an expression. |
2409 | */ |
2410 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isExpression(enum CXCursorKind); |
2411 | |
2412 | /** |
2413 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a statement. |
2414 | */ |
2415 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isStatement(enum CXCursorKind); |
2416 | |
2417 | /** |
2418 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an attribute. |
2419 | */ |
2420 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isAttribute(enum CXCursorKind); |
2421 | |
2422 | /** |
2423 | * Determine whether the given cursor has any attributes. |
2424 | */ |
2425 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_hasAttrs(CXCursor C); |
2426 | |
2427 | /** |
2428 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents an invalid |
2429 | * cursor. |
2430 | */ |
2431 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isInvalid(enum CXCursorKind); |
2432 | |
2433 | /** |
2434 | * Determine whether the given cursor kind represents a translation |
2435 | * unit. |
2436 | */ |
2437 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isTranslationUnit(enum CXCursorKind); |
2438 | |
2439 | /*** |
2440 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents a preprocessing |
2441 | * element, such as a preprocessor directive or macro instantiation. |
2442 | */ |
2443 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPreprocessing(enum CXCursorKind); |
2444 | |
2445 | /*** |
2446 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents a currently |
2447 | * unexposed piece of the AST (e.g., CXCursor_UnexposedStmt). |
2448 | */ |
2449 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isUnexposed(enum CXCursorKind); |
2450 | |
2451 | /** |
2452 | * Describe the linkage of the entity referred to by a cursor. |
2453 | */ |
2454 | enum CXLinkageKind { |
2455 | /** This value indicates that no linkage information is available |
2456 | * for a provided CXCursor. */ |
2457 | CXLinkage_Invalid, |
2458 | /** |
2459 | * This is the linkage for variables, parameters, and so on that |
2460 | * have automatic storage. This covers normal (non-extern) local variables. |
2461 | */ |
2462 | CXLinkage_NoLinkage, |
2463 | /** This is the linkage for static variables and static functions. */ |
2464 | CXLinkage_Internal, |
2465 | /** This is the linkage for entities with external linkage that live |
2466 | * in C++ anonymous namespaces.*/ |
2467 | CXLinkage_UniqueExternal, |
2468 | /** This is the linkage for entities with true, external linkage. */ |
2469 | CXLinkage_External |
2470 | }; |
2471 | |
2472 | /** |
2473 | * Determine the linkage of the entity referred to by a given cursor. |
2474 | */ |
2475 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLinkageKind clang_getCursorLinkage(CXCursor cursor); |
2476 | |
2477 | enum CXVisibilityKind { |
2478 | /** This value indicates that no visibility information is available |
2479 | * for a provided CXCursor. */ |
2480 | CXVisibility_Invalid, |
2481 | |
2482 | /** Symbol not seen by the linker. */ |
2483 | CXVisibility_Hidden, |
2484 | /** Symbol seen by the linker but resolves to a symbol inside this object. */ |
2485 | CXVisibility_Protected, |
2486 | /** Symbol seen by the linker and acts like a normal symbol. */ |
2487 | CXVisibility_Default |
2488 | }; |
2489 | |
2490 | /** |
2491 | * Describe the visibility of the entity referred to by a cursor. |
2492 | * |
2493 | * This returns the default visibility if not explicitly specified by |
2494 | * a visibility attribute. The default visibility may be changed by |
2495 | * commandline arguments. |
2496 | * |
2497 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
2498 | * |
2499 | * \returns The visibility of the cursor. |
2500 | */ |
2501 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXVisibilityKind clang_getCursorVisibility(CXCursor cursor); |
2502 | |
2503 | /** |
2504 | * Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to, |
2505 | * taking the current target platform into account. |
2506 | * |
2507 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
2508 | * |
2509 | * \returns The availability of the cursor. |
2510 | */ |
2511 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind |
2512 | clang_getCursorAvailability(CXCursor cursor); |
2513 | |
2514 | /** |
2515 | * Describes the availability of a given entity on a particular platform, e.g., |
2516 | * a particular class might only be available on Mac OS 10.7 or newer. |
2517 | */ |
2518 | typedef struct CXPlatformAvailability { |
2519 | /** |
2520 | * A string that describes the platform for which this structure |
2521 | * provides availability information. |
2522 | * |
2523 | * Possible values are "ios" or "macos". |
2524 | */ |
2525 | CXString Platform; |
2526 | /** |
2527 | * The version number in which this entity was introduced. |
2528 | */ |
2529 | CXVersion Introduced; |
2530 | /** |
2531 | * The version number in which this entity was deprecated (but is |
2532 | * still available). |
2533 | */ |
2534 | CXVersion Deprecated; |
2535 | /** |
2536 | * The version number in which this entity was obsoleted, and therefore |
2537 | * is no longer available. |
2538 | */ |
2539 | CXVersion Obsoleted; |
2540 | /** |
2541 | * Whether the entity is unconditionally unavailable on this platform. |
2542 | */ |
2543 | int Unavailable; |
2544 | /** |
2545 | * An optional message to provide to a user of this API, e.g., to |
2546 | * suggest replacement APIs. |
2547 | */ |
2548 | CXString Message; |
2549 | } CXPlatformAvailability; |
2550 | |
2551 | /** |
2552 | * Determine the availability of the entity that this cursor refers to |
2553 | * on any platforms for which availability information is known. |
2554 | * |
2555 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
2556 | * |
2557 | * \param always_deprecated If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the |
2558 | * entity is deprecated on all platforms. |
2559 | * |
2560 | * \param deprecated_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text |
2561 | * provided along with the unconditional deprecation of this entity. The client |
2562 | * is responsible for deallocating this string. |
2563 | * |
2564 | * \param always_unavailable If non-NULL, will be set to indicate whether the |
2565 | * entity is unavailable on all platforms. |
2566 | * |
2567 | * \param unavailable_message If non-NULL, will be set to the message text |
2568 | * provided along with the unconditional unavailability of this entity. The |
2569 | * client is responsible for deallocating this string. |
2570 | * |
2571 | * \param availability If non-NULL, an array of CXPlatformAvailability instances |
2572 | * that will be populated with platform availability information, up to either |
2573 | * the number of platforms for which availability information is available (as |
2574 | * returned by this function) or \c availability_size, whichever is smaller. |
2575 | * |
2576 | * \param availability_size The number of elements available in the |
2577 | * \c availability array. |
2578 | * |
2579 | * \returns The number of platforms (N) for which availability information is |
2580 | * available (which is unrelated to \c availability_size). |
2581 | * |
2582 | * Note that the client is responsible for calling |
2583 | * \c clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability to free each of the |
2584 | * platform-availability structures returned. There are |
2585 | * \c min(N, availability_size) such structures. |
2586 | */ |
2587 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getCursorPlatformAvailability( |
2588 | CXCursor cursor, int *always_deprecated, CXString *deprecated_message, |
2589 | int *always_unavailable, CXString *unavailable_message, |
2590 | CXPlatformAvailability *availability, int availability_size); |
2591 | |
2592 | /** |
2593 | * Free the memory associated with a \c CXPlatformAvailability structure. |
2594 | */ |
2595 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void |
2596 | clang_disposeCXPlatformAvailability(CXPlatformAvailability *availability); |
2597 | |
2598 | /** |
2599 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration and it has initializer returns |
2600 | * cursor referring to the initializer otherwise return null cursor. |
2601 | */ |
2602 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getVarDeclInitializer(CXCursor cursor); |
2603 | |
2604 | /** |
2605 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration that has global storage returns 1. |
2606 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration that doesn't have global storage |
2607 | * returns 0. Otherwise returns -1. |
2608 | */ |
2609 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_hasVarDeclGlobalStorage(CXCursor cursor); |
2610 | |
2611 | /** |
2612 | * If cursor refers to a variable declaration that has external storage |
2613 | * returns 1. If cursor refers to a variable declaration that doesn't have |
2614 | * external storage returns 0. Otherwise returns -1. |
2615 | */ |
2616 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_hasVarDeclExternalStorage(CXCursor cursor); |
2617 | |
2618 | /** |
2619 | * Describe the "language" of the entity referred to by a cursor. |
2620 | */ |
2621 | enum CXLanguageKind { |
2622 | CXLanguage_Invalid = 0, |
2623 | CXLanguage_C, |
2624 | CXLanguage_ObjC, |
2625 | CXLanguage_CPlusPlus |
2626 | }; |
2627 | |
2628 | /** |
2629 | * Determine the "language" of the entity referred to by a given cursor. |
2630 | */ |
2631 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXLanguageKind clang_getCursorLanguage(CXCursor cursor); |
2632 | |
2633 | /** |
2634 | * Describe the "thread-local storage (TLS) kind" of the declaration |
2635 | * referred to by a cursor. |
2636 | */ |
2637 | enum CXTLSKind { CXTLS_None = 0, CXTLS_Dynamic, CXTLS_Static }; |
2638 | |
2639 | /** |
2640 | * Determine the "thread-local storage (TLS) kind" of the declaration |
2641 | * referred to by a cursor. |
2642 | */ |
2643 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTLSKind clang_getCursorTLSKind(CXCursor cursor); |
2644 | |
2645 | /** |
2646 | * Returns the translation unit that a cursor originated from. |
2647 | */ |
2648 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTranslationUnit clang_Cursor_getTranslationUnit(CXCursor); |
2649 | |
2650 | /** |
2651 | * A fast container representing a set of CXCursors. |
2652 | */ |
2653 | typedef struct CXCursorSetImpl *CXCursorSet; |
2654 | |
2655 | /** |
2656 | * Creates an empty CXCursorSet. |
2657 | */ |
2658 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursorSet clang_createCXCursorSet(void); |
2659 | |
2660 | /** |
2661 | * Disposes a CXCursorSet and releases its associated memory. |
2662 | */ |
2663 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeCXCursorSet(CXCursorSet cset); |
2664 | |
2665 | /** |
2666 | * Queries a CXCursorSet to see if it contains a specific CXCursor. |
2667 | * |
2668 | * \returns non-zero if the set contains the specified cursor. |
2669 | */ |
2670 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_contains(CXCursorSet cset, |
2671 | CXCursor cursor); |
2672 | |
2673 | /** |
2674 | * Inserts a CXCursor into a CXCursorSet. |
2675 | * |
2676 | * \returns zero if the CXCursor was already in the set, and non-zero otherwise. |
2677 | */ |
2678 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXCursorSet_insert(CXCursorSet cset, |
2679 | CXCursor cursor); |
2680 | |
2681 | /** |
2682 | * Determine the semantic parent of the given cursor. |
2683 | * |
2684 | * The semantic parent of a cursor is the cursor that semantically contains |
2685 | * the given \p cursor. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents |
2686 | * are equivalent (the lexical parent is returned by |
2687 | * \c clang_getCursorLexicalParent()). They diverge when declarations or |
2688 | * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example: |
2689 | * |
2690 | * \code |
2691 | * class C { |
2692 | * void f(); |
2693 | * }; |
2694 | * |
2695 | * void C::f() { } |
2696 | * \endcode |
2697 | * |
2698 | * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is |
2699 | * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is |
2700 | * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this |
2701 | * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the |
2702 | * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics |
2703 | * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the |
2704 | * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration, |
2705 | * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations |
2706 | * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context. |
2707 | * |
2708 | * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their |
2709 | * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C |
2710 | * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit. |
2711 | * |
2712 | * For global declarations, the semantic parent is the translation unit. |
2713 | */ |
2714 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorSemanticParent(CXCursor cursor); |
2715 | |
2716 | /** |
2717 | * Determine the lexical parent of the given cursor. |
2718 | * |
2719 | * The lexical parent of a cursor is the cursor in which the given \p cursor |
2720 | * was actually written. For many declarations, the lexical and semantic parents |
2721 | * are equivalent (the semantic parent is returned by |
2722 | * \c clang_getCursorSemanticParent()). They diverge when declarations or |
2723 | * definitions are provided out-of-line. For example: |
2724 | * |
2725 | * \code |
2726 | * class C { |
2727 | * void f(); |
2728 | * }; |
2729 | * |
2730 | * void C::f() { } |
2731 | * \endcode |
2732 | * |
2733 | * In the out-of-line definition of \c C::f, the semantic parent is |
2734 | * the class \c C, of which this function is a member. The lexical parent is |
2735 | * the place where the declaration actually occurs in the source code; in this |
2736 | * case, the definition occurs in the translation unit. In general, the |
2737 | * lexical parent for a given entity can change without affecting the semantics |
2738 | * of the program, and the lexical parent of different declarations of the |
2739 | * same entity may be different. Changing the semantic parent of a declaration, |
2740 | * on the other hand, can have a major impact on semantics, and redeclarations |
2741 | * of a particular entity should all have the same semantic context. |
2742 | * |
2743 | * In the example above, both declarations of \c C::f have \c C as their |
2744 | * semantic context, while the lexical context of the first \c C::f is \c C |
2745 | * and the lexical context of the second \c C::f is the translation unit. |
2746 | * |
2747 | * For declarations written in the global scope, the lexical parent is |
2748 | * the translation unit. |
2749 | */ |
2750 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorLexicalParent(CXCursor cursor); |
2751 | |
2752 | /** |
2753 | * Determine the set of methods that are overridden by the given |
2754 | * method. |
2755 | * |
2756 | * In both Objective-C and C++, a method (aka virtual member function, |
2757 | * in C++) can override a virtual method in a base class. For |
2758 | * Objective-C, a method is said to override any method in the class's |
2759 | * base class, its protocols, or its categories' protocols, that has the same |
2760 | * selector and is of the same kind (class or instance). |
2761 | * If no such method exists, the search continues to the class's superclass, |
2762 | * its protocols, and its categories, and so on. A method from an Objective-C |
2763 | * implementation is considered to override the same methods as its |
2764 | * corresponding method in the interface. |
2765 | * |
2766 | * For C++, a virtual member function overrides any virtual member |
2767 | * function with the same signature that occurs in its base |
2768 | * classes. With multiple inheritance, a virtual member function can |
2769 | * override several virtual member functions coming from different |
2770 | * base classes. |
2771 | * |
2772 | * In all cases, this function determines the immediate overridden |
2773 | * method, rather than all of the overridden methods. For example, if |
2774 | * a method is originally declared in a class A, then overridden in B |
2775 | * (which in inherits from A) and also in C (which inherited from B), |
2776 | * then the only overridden method returned from this function when |
2777 | * invoked on C's method will be B's method. The client may then |
2778 | * invoke this function again, given the previously-found overridden |
2779 | * methods, to map out the complete method-override set. |
2780 | * |
2781 | * \param cursor A cursor representing an Objective-C or C++ |
2782 | * method. This routine will compute the set of methods that this |
2783 | * method overrides. |
2784 | * |
2785 | * \param overridden A pointer whose pointee will be replaced with a |
2786 | * pointer to an array of cursors, representing the set of overridden |
2787 | * methods. If there are no overridden methods, the pointee will be |
2788 | * set to NULL. The pointee must be freed via a call to |
2789 | * \c clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(). |
2790 | * |
2791 | * \param num_overridden A pointer to the number of overridden |
2792 | * functions, will be set to the number of overridden functions in the |
2793 | * array pointed to by \p overridden. |
2794 | */ |
2795 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getOverriddenCursors(CXCursor cursor, |
2796 | CXCursor **overridden, |
2797 | unsigned *num_overridden); |
2798 | |
2799 | /** |
2800 | * Free the set of overridden cursors returned by \c |
2801 | * clang_getOverriddenCursors(). |
2802 | */ |
2803 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeOverriddenCursors(CXCursor *overridden); |
2804 | |
2805 | /** |
2806 | * Retrieve the file that is included by the given inclusion directive |
2807 | * cursor. |
2808 | */ |
2809 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_getIncludedFile(CXCursor cursor); |
2810 | |
2811 | /** |
2812 | * @} |
2813 | */ |
2814 | |
2815 | /** |
2816 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_SOURCE Mapping between cursors and source code |
2817 | * |
2818 | * Cursors represent a location within the Abstract Syntax Tree (AST). These |
2819 | * routines help map between cursors and the physical locations where the |
2820 | * described entities occur in the source code. The mapping is provided in |
2821 | * both directions, so one can map from source code to the AST and back. |
2822 | * |
2823 | * @{ |
2824 | */ |
2825 | |
2826 | /** |
2827 | * Map a source location to the cursor that describes the entity at that |
2828 | * location in the source code. |
2829 | * |
2830 | * clang_getCursor() maps an arbitrary source location within a translation |
2831 | * unit down to the most specific cursor that describes the entity at that |
2832 | * location. For example, given an expression \c x + y, invoking |
2833 | * clang_getCursor() with a source location pointing to "x" will return the |
2834 | * cursor for "x"; similarly for "y". If the cursor points anywhere between |
2835 | * "x" or "y" (e.g., on the + or the whitespace around it), clang_getCursor() |
2836 | * will return a cursor referring to the "+" expression. |
2837 | * |
2838 | * \returns a cursor representing the entity at the given source location, or |
2839 | * a NULL cursor if no such entity can be found. |
2840 | */ |
2841 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursor(CXTranslationUnit, CXSourceLocation); |
2842 | |
2843 | /** |
2844 | * Retrieve the physical location of the source constructor referenced |
2845 | * by the given cursor. |
2846 | * |
2847 | * The location of a declaration is typically the location of the name of that |
2848 | * declaration, where the name of that declaration would occur if it is |
2849 | * unnamed, or some keyword that introduces that particular declaration. |
2850 | * The location of a reference is where that reference occurs within the |
2851 | * source code. |
2852 | */ |
2853 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getCursorLocation(CXCursor); |
2854 | |
2855 | /** |
2856 | * Retrieve the physical extent of the source construct referenced by |
2857 | * the given cursor. |
2858 | * |
2859 | * The extent of a cursor starts with the file/line/column pointing at the |
2860 | * first character within the source construct that the cursor refers to and |
2861 | * ends with the last character within that source construct. For a |
2862 | * declaration, the extent covers the declaration itself. For a reference, |
2863 | * the extent covers the location of the reference (e.g., where the referenced |
2864 | * entity was actually used). |
2865 | */ |
2866 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorExtent(CXCursor); |
2867 | |
2868 | /** |
2869 | * @} |
2870 | */ |
2871 | |
2872 | /** |
2873 | * \defgroup CINDEX_TYPES Type information for CXCursors |
2874 | * |
2875 | * @{ |
2876 | */ |
2877 | |
2878 | /** |
2879 | * Describes the kind of type |
2880 | */ |
2881 | enum CXTypeKind { |
2882 | /** |
2883 | * Represents an invalid type (e.g., where no type is available). |
2884 | */ |
2885 | CXType_Invalid = 0, |
2886 | |
2887 | /** |
2888 | * A type whose specific kind is not exposed via this |
2889 | * interface. |
2890 | */ |
2891 | CXType_Unexposed = 1, |
2892 | |
2893 | /* Builtin types */ |
2894 | CXType_Void = 2, |
2895 | CXType_Bool = 3, |
2896 | CXType_Char_U = 4, |
2897 | CXType_UChar = 5, |
2898 | CXType_Char16 = 6, |
2899 | CXType_Char32 = 7, |
2900 | CXType_UShort = 8, |
2901 | CXType_UInt = 9, |
2902 | CXType_ULong = 10, |
2903 | CXType_ULongLong = 11, |
2904 | CXType_UInt128 = 12, |
2905 | CXType_Char_S = 13, |
2906 | CXType_SChar = 14, |
2907 | CXType_WChar = 15, |
2908 | CXType_Short = 16, |
2909 | CXType_Int = 17, |
2910 | CXType_Long = 18, |
2911 | CXType_LongLong = 19, |
2912 | CXType_Int128 = 20, |
2913 | CXType_Float = 21, |
2914 | CXType_Double = 22, |
2915 | CXType_LongDouble = 23, |
2916 | CXType_NullPtr = 24, |
2917 | CXType_Overload = 25, |
2918 | CXType_Dependent = 26, |
2919 | CXType_ObjCId = 27, |
2920 | CXType_ObjCClass = 28, |
2921 | CXType_ObjCSel = 29, |
2922 | CXType_Float128 = 30, |
2923 | CXType_Half = 31, |
2924 | CXType_Float16 = 32, |
2925 | CXType_ShortAccum = 33, |
2926 | CXType_Accum = 34, |
2927 | CXType_LongAccum = 35, |
2928 | CXType_UShortAccum = 36, |
2929 | CXType_UAccum = 37, |
2930 | CXType_ULongAccum = 38, |
2931 | CXType_BFloat16 = 39, |
2932 | CXType_Ibm128 = 40, |
2933 | CXType_FirstBuiltin = CXType_Void, |
2934 | CXType_LastBuiltin = CXType_Ibm128, |
2935 | |
2936 | CXType_Complex = 100, |
2937 | CXType_Pointer = 101, |
2938 | CXType_BlockPointer = 102, |
2939 | CXType_LValueReference = 103, |
2940 | CXType_RValueReference = 104, |
2941 | CXType_Record = 105, |
2942 | CXType_Enum = 106, |
2943 | CXType_Typedef = 107, |
2944 | CXType_ObjCInterface = 108, |
2945 | CXType_ObjCObjectPointer = 109, |
2946 | CXType_FunctionNoProto = 110, |
2947 | CXType_FunctionProto = 111, |
2948 | CXType_ConstantArray = 112, |
2949 | CXType_Vector = 113, |
2950 | CXType_IncompleteArray = 114, |
2951 | CXType_VariableArray = 115, |
2952 | CXType_DependentSizedArray = 116, |
2953 | CXType_MemberPointer = 117, |
2954 | CXType_Auto = 118, |
2955 | |
2956 | /** |
2957 | * Represents a type that was referred to using an elaborated type keyword. |
2958 | * |
2959 | * E.g., struct S, or via a qualified name, e.g., N::M::type, or both. |
2960 | */ |
2961 | CXType_Elaborated = 119, |
2962 | |
2963 | /* OpenCL PipeType. */ |
2964 | CXType_Pipe = 120, |
2965 | |
2966 | /* OpenCL builtin types. */ |
2967 | CXType_OCLImage1dRO = 121, |
2968 | CXType_OCLImage1dArrayRO = 122, |
2969 | CXType_OCLImage1dBufferRO = 123, |
2970 | CXType_OCLImage2dRO = 124, |
2971 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayRO = 125, |
2972 | CXType_OCLImage2dDepthRO = 126, |
2973 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthRO = 127, |
2974 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAARO = 128, |
2975 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAARO = 129, |
2976 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthRO = 130, |
2977 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthRO = 131, |
2978 | CXType_OCLImage3dRO = 132, |
2979 | CXType_OCLImage1dWO = 133, |
2980 | CXType_OCLImage1dArrayWO = 134, |
2981 | CXType_OCLImage1dBufferWO = 135, |
2982 | CXType_OCLImage2dWO = 136, |
2983 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayWO = 137, |
2984 | CXType_OCLImage2dDepthWO = 138, |
2985 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthWO = 139, |
2986 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAAWO = 140, |
2987 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAAWO = 141, |
2988 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthWO = 142, |
2989 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthWO = 143, |
2990 | CXType_OCLImage3dWO = 144, |
2991 | CXType_OCLImage1dRW = 145, |
2992 | CXType_OCLImage1dArrayRW = 146, |
2993 | CXType_OCLImage1dBufferRW = 147, |
2994 | CXType_OCLImage2dRW = 148, |
2995 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayRW = 149, |
2996 | CXType_OCLImage2dDepthRW = 150, |
2997 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayDepthRW = 151, |
2998 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAARW = 152, |
2999 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAARW = 153, |
3000 | CXType_OCLImage2dMSAADepthRW = 154, |
3001 | CXType_OCLImage2dArrayMSAADepthRW = 155, |
3002 | CXType_OCLImage3dRW = 156, |
3003 | CXType_OCLSampler = 157, |
3004 | CXType_OCLEvent = 158, |
3005 | CXType_OCLQueue = 159, |
3006 | CXType_OCLReserveID = 160, |
3007 | |
3008 | CXType_ObjCObject = 161, |
3009 | CXType_ObjCTypeParam = 162, |
3010 | CXType_Attributed = 163, |
3011 | |
3012 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCMcePayload = 164, |
3013 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImePayload = 165, |
3014 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCRefPayload = 166, |
3015 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCSicPayload = 167, |
3016 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCMceResult = 168, |
3017 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResult = 169, |
3018 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCRefResult = 170, |
3019 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCSicResult = 171, |
3020 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResultSingleReferenceStreamout = 172, |
3021 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResultDualReferenceStreamout = 173, |
3022 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeSingleReferenceStreamin = 174, |
3023 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeDualReferenceStreamin = 175, |
3024 | |
3025 | /* Old aliases for AVC OpenCL extension types. */ |
3026 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResultSingleRefStreamout = 172, |
3027 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeResultDualRefStreamout = 173, |
3028 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeSingleRefStreamin = 174, |
3029 | CXType_OCLIntelSubgroupAVCImeDualRefStreamin = 175, |
3030 | |
3031 | CXType_ExtVector = 176, |
3032 | CXType_Atomic = 177, |
3033 | CXType_BTFTagAttributed = 178, |
3034 | |
3035 | /* HLSL Types */ |
3036 | CXType_HLSLResource = 179, |
3037 | CXType_HLSLAttributedResource = 180, |
3038 | CXType_HLSLInlineSpirv = 181 |
3039 | }; |
3040 | |
3041 | /** |
3042 | * Describes the calling convention of a function type |
3043 | */ |
3044 | enum CXCallingConv { |
3045 | CXCallingConv_Default = 0, |
3046 | CXCallingConv_C = 1, |
3047 | CXCallingConv_X86StdCall = 2, |
3048 | CXCallingConv_X86FastCall = 3, |
3049 | CXCallingConv_X86ThisCall = 4, |
3050 | CXCallingConv_X86Pascal = 5, |
3051 | CXCallingConv_AAPCS = 6, |
3052 | CXCallingConv_AAPCS_VFP = 7, |
3053 | CXCallingConv_X86RegCall = 8, |
3054 | CXCallingConv_IntelOclBicc = 9, |
3055 | CXCallingConv_Win64 = 10, |
3056 | /* Alias for compatibility with older versions of API. */ |
3057 | CXCallingConv_X86_64Win64 = CXCallingConv_Win64, |
3058 | CXCallingConv_X86_64SysV = 11, |
3059 | CXCallingConv_X86VectorCall = 12, |
3060 | CXCallingConv_Swift = 13, |
3061 | CXCallingConv_PreserveMost = 14, |
3062 | CXCallingConv_PreserveAll = 15, |
3063 | CXCallingConv_AArch64VectorCall = 16, |
3064 | CXCallingConv_SwiftAsync = 17, |
3065 | CXCallingConv_AArch64SVEPCS = 18, |
3066 | CXCallingConv_M68kRTD = 19, |
3067 | CXCallingConv_PreserveNone = 20, |
3068 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVectorCall = 21, |
3069 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_32 = 22, |
3070 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_64 = 23, |
3071 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_128 = 24, |
3072 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_256 = 25, |
3073 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_512 = 26, |
3074 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_1024 = 27, |
3075 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_2048 = 28, |
3076 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_4096 = 29, |
3077 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_8192 = 30, |
3078 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_16384 = 31, |
3079 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_32768 = 32, |
3080 | CXCallingConv_RISCVVLSCall_65536 = 33, |
3081 | |
3082 | CXCallingConv_Invalid = 100, |
3083 | CXCallingConv_Unexposed = 200 |
3084 | }; |
3085 | |
3086 | /** |
3087 | * The type of an element in the abstract syntax tree. |
3088 | * |
3089 | */ |
3090 | typedef struct { |
3091 | enum CXTypeKind kind; |
3092 | void *data[2]; |
3093 | } CXType; |
3094 | |
3095 | /** |
3096 | * Retrieve the type of a CXCursor (if any). |
3097 | */ |
3098 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorType(CXCursor C); |
3099 | |
3100 | /** |
3101 | * Pretty-print the underlying type using the rules of the |
3102 | * language of the translation unit from which it came. |
3103 | * |
3104 | * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned. |
3105 | */ |
3106 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeSpelling(CXType CT); |
3107 | |
3108 | /** |
3109 | * Retrieve the underlying type of a typedef declaration. |
3110 | * |
3111 | * If the cursor does not reference a typedef declaration, an invalid type is |
3112 | * returned. |
3113 | */ |
3114 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getTypedefDeclUnderlyingType(CXCursor C); |
3115 | |
3116 | /** |
3117 | * Retrieve the integer type of an enum declaration. |
3118 | * |
3119 | * If the cursor does not reference an enum declaration, an invalid type is |
3120 | * returned. |
3121 | */ |
3122 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getEnumDeclIntegerType(CXCursor C); |
3123 | |
3124 | /** |
3125 | * Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as a signed |
3126 | * long long. |
3127 | * |
3128 | * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, LLONG_MIN is |
3129 | * returned. Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of |
3130 | * the cursor must be verified before calling this function. |
3131 | */ |
3132 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getEnumConstantDeclValue(CXCursor C); |
3133 | |
3134 | /** |
3135 | * Retrieve the integer value of an enum constant declaration as an unsigned |
3136 | * long long. |
3137 | * |
3138 | * If the cursor does not reference an enum constant declaration, ULLONG_MAX is |
3139 | * returned. Since this is also potentially a valid constant value, the kind of |
3140 | * the cursor must be verified before calling this function. |
3141 | */ |
3142 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long |
3143 | clang_getEnumConstantDeclUnsignedValue(CXCursor C); |
3144 | |
3145 | /** |
3146 | * Returns non-zero if the cursor specifies a Record member that is a bit-field. |
3147 | */ |
3148 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isBitField(CXCursor C); |
3149 | |
3150 | /** |
3151 | * Retrieve the bit width of a bit-field declaration as an integer. |
3152 | * |
3153 | * If the cursor does not reference a bit-field, or if the bit-field's width |
3154 | * expression cannot be evaluated, -1 is returned. |
3155 | * |
3156 | * For example: |
3157 | * \code |
3158 | * if (clang_Cursor_isBitField(Cursor)) { |
3159 | * int Width = clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(Cursor); |
3160 | * if (Width != -1) { |
3161 | * // The bit-field width is not value-dependent. |
3162 | * } |
3163 | * } |
3164 | * \endcode |
3165 | */ |
3166 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getFieldDeclBitWidth(CXCursor C); |
3167 | |
3168 | /** |
3169 | * Retrieve the number of non-variadic arguments associated with a given |
3170 | * cursor. |
3171 | * |
3172 | * The number of arguments can be determined for calls as well as for |
3173 | * declarations of functions or methods. For other cursors -1 is returned. |
3174 | */ |
3175 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumArguments(CXCursor C); |
3176 | |
3177 | /** |
3178 | * Retrieve the argument cursor of a function or method. |
3179 | * |
3180 | * The argument cursor can be determined for calls as well as for declarations |
3181 | * of functions or methods. For other cursors and for invalid indices, an |
3182 | * invalid cursor is returned. |
3183 | */ |
3184 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Cursor_getArgument(CXCursor C, unsigned i); |
3185 | |
3186 | /** |
3187 | * Describes the kind of a template argument. |
3188 | * |
3189 | * See the definition of llvm::clang::TemplateArgument::ArgKind for full |
3190 | * element descriptions. |
3191 | */ |
3192 | enum CXTemplateArgumentKind { |
3193 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Null, |
3194 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Type, |
3195 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Declaration, |
3196 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_NullPtr, |
3197 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Integral, |
3198 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Template, |
3199 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_TemplateExpansion, |
3200 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Expression, |
3201 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Pack, |
3202 | /* Indicates an error case, preventing the kind from being deduced. */ |
3203 | CXTemplateArgumentKind_Invalid |
3204 | }; |
3205 | |
3206 | /** |
3207 | * Returns the number of template args of a function, struct, or class decl |
3208 | * representing a template specialization. |
3209 | * |
3210 | * If the argument cursor cannot be converted into a template function |
3211 | * declaration, -1 is returned. |
3212 | * |
3213 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
3214 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
3215 | * void foo() { ... } |
3216 | * |
3217 | * template <> |
3218 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
3219 | * |
3220 | * The value 3 would be returned from this call. |
3221 | */ |
3222 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getNumTemplateArguments(CXCursor C); |
3223 | |
3224 | /** |
3225 | * Retrieve the kind of the I'th template argument of the CXCursor C. |
3226 | * |
3227 | * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, StructDecl, or |
3228 | * ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization, an invalid template argument kind is |
3229 | * returned. |
3230 | * |
3231 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
3232 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
3233 | * void foo() { ... } |
3234 | * |
3235 | * template <> |
3236 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
3237 | * |
3238 | * For I = 0, 1, and 2, Type, Integral, and Integral will be returned, |
3239 | * respectively. |
3240 | */ |
3241 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTemplateArgumentKind |
3242 | clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentKind(CXCursor C, unsigned I); |
3243 | |
3244 | /** |
3245 | * Retrieve a CXType representing the type of a TemplateArgument of a |
3246 | * function decl representing a template specialization. |
3247 | * |
3248 | * If the argument CXCursor does not represent a FunctionDecl, StructDecl, |
3249 | * ClassDecl or ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization whose I'th template argument |
3250 | * has a kind of CXTemplateArgKind_Integral, an invalid type is returned. |
3251 | * |
3252 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
3253 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
3254 | * void foo() { ... } |
3255 | * |
3256 | * template <> |
3257 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
3258 | * |
3259 | * If called with I = 0, "float", will be returned. |
3260 | * Invalid types will be returned for I == 1 or 2. |
3261 | */ |
3262 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentType(CXCursor C, |
3263 | unsigned I); |
3264 | |
3265 | /** |
3266 | * Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function |
3267 | * decl representing a template specialization) as a signed long long. |
3268 | * |
3269 | * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a |
3270 | * FunctionDecl, StructDecl, ClassDecl or ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization |
3271 | * whose I'th template argument is not an integral value. |
3272 | * |
3273 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
3274 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
3275 | * void foo() { ... } |
3276 | * |
3277 | * template <> |
3278 | * void foo<float, -7, true>(); |
3279 | * |
3280 | * If called with I = 1 or 2, -7 or true will be returned, respectively. |
3281 | * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined. |
3282 | */ |
3283 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentValue(CXCursor C, |
3284 | unsigned I); |
3285 | |
3286 | /** |
3287 | * Retrieve the value of an Integral TemplateArgument (of a function |
3288 | * decl representing a template specialization) as an unsigned long long. |
3289 | * |
3290 | * It is undefined to call this function on a CXCursor that does not represent a |
3291 | * FunctionDecl, StructDecl, ClassDecl or ClassTemplatePartialSpecialization or |
3292 | * whose I'th template argument is not an integral value. |
3293 | * |
3294 | * For example, for the following declaration and specialization: |
3295 | * template <typename T, int kInt, bool kBool> |
3296 | * void foo() { ... } |
3297 | * |
3298 | * template <> |
3299 | * void foo<float, 2147483649, true>(); |
3300 | * |
3301 | * If called with I = 1 or 2, 2147483649 or true will be returned, respectively. |
3302 | * For I == 0, this function's behavior is undefined. |
3303 | */ |
3304 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long |
3305 | clang_Cursor_getTemplateArgumentUnsignedValue(CXCursor C, unsigned I); |
3306 | |
3307 | /** |
3308 | * Determine whether two CXTypes represent the same type. |
3309 | * |
3310 | * \returns non-zero if the CXTypes represent the same type and |
3311 | * zero otherwise. |
3312 | */ |
3313 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_equalTypes(CXType A, CXType B); |
3314 | |
3315 | /** |
3316 | * Return the canonical type for a CXType. |
3317 | * |
3318 | * Clang's type system explicitly models typedefs and all the ways |
3319 | * a specific type can be represented. The canonical type is the underlying |
3320 | * type with all the "sugar" removed. For example, if 'T' is a typedef |
3321 | * for 'int', the canonical type for 'T' would be 'int'. |
3322 | */ |
3323 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCanonicalType(CXType T); |
3324 | |
3325 | /** |
3326 | * Determine whether a CXType has the "const" qualifier set, |
3327 | * without looking through typedefs that may have added "const" at a |
3328 | * different level. |
3329 | */ |
3330 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isConstQualifiedType(CXType T); |
3331 | |
3332 | /** |
3333 | * Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is |
3334 | * function like. |
3335 | */ |
3336 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroFunctionLike(CXCursor C); |
3337 | |
3338 | /** |
3339 | * Determine whether a CXCursor that is a macro, is a |
3340 | * builtin one. |
3341 | */ |
3342 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isMacroBuiltin(CXCursor C); |
3343 | |
3344 | /** |
3345 | * Determine whether a CXCursor that is a function declaration, is an |
3346 | * inline declaration. |
3347 | */ |
3348 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isFunctionInlined(CXCursor C); |
3349 | |
3350 | /** |
3351 | * Determine whether a CXType has the "volatile" qualifier set, |
3352 | * without looking through typedefs that may have added "volatile" at |
3353 | * a different level. |
3354 | */ |
3355 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVolatileQualifiedType(CXType T); |
3356 | |
3357 | /** |
3358 | * Determine whether a CXType has the "restrict" qualifier set, |
3359 | * without looking through typedefs that may have added "restrict" at a |
3360 | * different level. |
3361 | */ |
3362 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(CXType T); |
3363 | |
3364 | /** |
3365 | * Returns the address space of the given type. |
3366 | */ |
3367 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getAddressSpace(CXType T); |
3368 | |
3369 | /** |
3370 | * Returns the typedef name of the given type. |
3371 | */ |
3372 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypedefName(CXType CT); |
3373 | |
3374 | /** |
3375 | * For pointer types, returns the type of the pointee. |
3376 | */ |
3377 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getPointeeType(CXType T); |
3378 | |
3379 | /** |
3380 | * Retrieve the unqualified variant of the given type, removing as |
3381 | * little sugar as possible. |
3382 | * |
3383 | * For example, given the following series of typedefs: |
3384 | * |
3385 | * \code |
3386 | * typedef int Integer; |
3387 | * typedef const Integer CInteger; |
3388 | * typedef CInteger DifferenceType; |
3389 | * \endcode |
3390 | * |
3391 | * Executing \c clang_getUnqualifiedType() on a \c CXType that |
3392 | * represents \c DifferenceType, will desugar to a type representing |
3393 | * \c Integer, that has no qualifiers. |
3394 | * |
3395 | * And, executing \c clang_getUnqualifiedType() on the type of the |
3396 | * first argument of the following function declaration: |
3397 | * |
3398 | * \code |
3399 | * void foo(const int); |
3400 | * \endcode |
3401 | * |
3402 | * Will return a type representing \c int, removing the \c const |
3403 | * qualifier. |
3404 | * |
3405 | * Sugar over array types is not desugared. |
3406 | * |
3407 | * A type can be checked for qualifiers with \c |
3408 | * clang_isConstQualifiedType(), \c clang_isVolatileQualifiedType() |
3409 | * and \c clang_isRestrictQualifiedType(). |
3410 | * |
3411 | * A type that resulted from a call to \c clang_getUnqualifiedType |
3412 | * will return \c false for all of the above calls. |
3413 | */ |
3414 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getUnqualifiedType(CXType CT); |
3415 | |
3416 | /** |
3417 | * For reference types (e.g., "const int&"), returns the type that the |
3418 | * reference refers to (e.g "const int"). |
3419 | * |
3420 | * Otherwise, returns the type itself. |
3421 | * |
3422 | * A type that has kind \c CXType_LValueReference or |
3423 | * \c CXType_RValueReference is a reference type. |
3424 | */ |
3425 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getNonReferenceType(CXType CT); |
3426 | |
3427 | /** |
3428 | * Return the cursor for the declaration of the given type. |
3429 | */ |
3430 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getTypeDeclaration(CXType T); |
3431 | |
3432 | /** |
3433 | * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified declaration. |
3434 | */ |
3435 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getDeclObjCTypeEncoding(CXCursor C); |
3436 | |
3437 | /** |
3438 | * Returns the Objective-C type encoding for the specified CXType. |
3439 | */ |
3440 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Type_getObjCEncoding(CXType type); |
3441 | |
3442 | /** |
3443 | * Retrieve the spelling of a given CXTypeKind. |
3444 | */ |
3445 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypeKindSpelling(enum CXTypeKind K); |
3446 | |
3447 | /** |
3448 | * Retrieve the calling convention associated with a function type. |
3449 | * |
3450 | * If a non-function type is passed in, CXCallingConv_Invalid is returned. |
3451 | */ |
3452 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCallingConv clang_getFunctionTypeCallingConv(CXType T); |
3453 | |
3454 | /** |
3455 | * Retrieve the return type associated with a function type. |
3456 | * |
3457 | * If a non-function type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
3458 | */ |
3459 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getResultType(CXType T); |
3460 | |
3461 | /** |
3462 | * Retrieve the exception specification type associated with a function type. |
3463 | * This is a value of type CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind. |
3464 | * |
3465 | * If a non-function type is passed in, an error code of -1 is returned. |
3466 | */ |
3467 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getExceptionSpecificationType(CXType T); |
3468 | |
3469 | /** |
3470 | * Retrieve the number of non-variadic parameters associated with a |
3471 | * function type. |
3472 | * |
3473 | * If a non-function type is passed in, -1 is returned. |
3474 | */ |
3475 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getNumArgTypes(CXType T); |
3476 | |
3477 | /** |
3478 | * Retrieve the type of a parameter of a function type. |
3479 | * |
3480 | * If a non-function type is passed in or the function does not have enough |
3481 | * parameters, an invalid type is returned. |
3482 | */ |
3483 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArgType(CXType T, unsigned i); |
3484 | |
3485 | /** |
3486 | * Retrieves the base type of the ObjCObjectType. |
3487 | * |
3488 | * If the type is not an ObjC object, an invalid type is returned. |
3489 | */ |
3490 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getObjCObjectBaseType(CXType T); |
3491 | |
3492 | /** |
3493 | * Retrieve the number of protocol references associated with an ObjC object/id. |
3494 | * |
3495 | * If the type is not an ObjC object, 0 is returned. |
3496 | */ |
3497 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_getNumObjCProtocolRefs(CXType T); |
3498 | |
3499 | /** |
3500 | * Retrieve the decl for a protocol reference for an ObjC object/id. |
3501 | * |
3502 | * If the type is not an ObjC object or there are not enough protocol |
3503 | * references, an invalid cursor is returned. |
3504 | */ |
3505 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_Type_getObjCProtocolDecl(CXType T, unsigned i); |
3506 | |
3507 | /** |
3508 | * Retrieve the number of type arguments associated with an ObjC object. |
3509 | * |
3510 | * If the type is not an ObjC object, 0 is returned. |
3511 | */ |
3512 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_getNumObjCTypeArgs(CXType T); |
3513 | |
3514 | /** |
3515 | * Retrieve a type argument associated with an ObjC object. |
3516 | * |
3517 | * If the type is not an ObjC or the index is not valid, |
3518 | * an invalid type is returned. |
3519 | */ |
3520 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getObjCTypeArg(CXType T, unsigned i); |
3521 | |
3522 | /** |
3523 | * Return 1 if the CXType is a variadic function type, and 0 otherwise. |
3524 | */ |
3525 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isFunctionTypeVariadic(CXType T); |
3526 | |
3527 | /** |
3528 | * Retrieve the return type associated with a given cursor. |
3529 | * |
3530 | * This only returns a valid type if the cursor refers to a function or method. |
3531 | */ |
3532 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getCursorResultType(CXCursor C); |
3533 | |
3534 | /** |
3535 | * Retrieve the exception specification type associated with a given cursor. |
3536 | * This is a value of type CXCursor_ExceptionSpecificationKind. |
3537 | * |
3538 | * This only returns a valid result if the cursor refers to a function or |
3539 | * method. |
3540 | */ |
3541 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_getCursorExceptionSpecificationType(CXCursor C); |
3542 | |
3543 | /** |
3544 | * Return 1 if the CXType is a POD (plain old data) type, and 0 |
3545 | * otherwise. |
3546 | */ |
3547 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isPODType(CXType T); |
3548 | |
3549 | /** |
3550 | * Return the element type of an array, complex, or vector type. |
3551 | * |
3552 | * If a type is passed in that is not an array, complex, or vector type, |
3553 | * an invalid type is returned. |
3554 | */ |
3555 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getElementType(CXType T); |
3556 | |
3557 | /** |
3558 | * Return the number of elements of an array or vector type. |
3559 | * |
3560 | * If a type is passed in that is not an array or vector type, |
3561 | * -1 is returned. |
3562 | */ |
3563 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getNumElements(CXType T); |
3564 | |
3565 | /** |
3566 | * Return the element type of an array type. |
3567 | * |
3568 | * If a non-array type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
3569 | */ |
3570 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getArrayElementType(CXType T); |
3571 | |
3572 | /** |
3573 | * Return the array size of a constant array. |
3574 | * |
3575 | * If a non-array type is passed in, -1 is returned. |
3576 | */ |
3577 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getArraySize(CXType T); |
3578 | |
3579 | /** |
3580 | * Retrieve the type named by the qualified-id. |
3581 | * |
3582 | * If a non-elaborated type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
3583 | */ |
3584 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getNamedType(CXType T); |
3585 | |
3586 | /** |
3587 | * Determine if a typedef is 'transparent' tag. |
3588 | * |
3589 | * A typedef is considered 'transparent' if it shares a name and spelling |
3590 | * location with its underlying tag type, as is the case with the NS_ENUM macro. |
3591 | * |
3592 | * \returns non-zero if transparent and zero otherwise. |
3593 | */ |
3594 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_isTransparentTagTypedef(CXType T); |
3595 | |
3596 | enum CXTypeNullabilityKind { |
3597 | /** |
3598 | * Values of this type can never be null. |
3599 | */ |
3600 | CXTypeNullability_NonNull = 0, |
3601 | /** |
3602 | * Values of this type can be null. |
3603 | */ |
3604 | CXTypeNullability_Nullable = 1, |
3605 | /** |
3606 | * Whether values of this type can be null is (explicitly) |
3607 | * unspecified. This captures a (fairly rare) case where we |
3608 | * can't conclude anything about the nullability of the type even |
3609 | * though it has been considered. |
3610 | */ |
3611 | CXTypeNullability_Unspecified = 2, |
3612 | /** |
3613 | * Nullability is not applicable to this type. |
3614 | */ |
3615 | CXTypeNullability_Invalid = 3, |
3616 | |
3617 | /** |
3618 | * Generally behaves like Nullable, except when used in a block parameter that |
3619 | * was imported into a swift async method. There, swift will assume that the |
3620 | * parameter can get null even if no error occurred. _Nullable parameters are |
3621 | * assumed to only get null on error. |
3622 | */ |
3623 | CXTypeNullability_NullableResult = 4 |
3624 | }; |
3625 | |
3626 | /** |
3627 | * Retrieve the nullability kind of a pointer type. |
3628 | */ |
3629 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXTypeNullabilityKind clang_Type_getNullability(CXType T); |
3630 | |
3631 | /** |
3632 | * List the possible error codes for \c clang_Type_getSizeOf, |
3633 | * \c clang_Type_getAlignOf, \c clang_Type_getOffsetOf, |
3634 | * \c clang_Cursor_getOffsetOf, and \c clang_getOffsetOfBase. |
3635 | * |
3636 | * A value of this enumeration type can be returned if the target type is not |
3637 | * a valid argument to sizeof, alignof or offsetof. |
3638 | */ |
3639 | enum CXTypeLayoutError { |
3640 | /** |
3641 | * Type is of kind CXType_Invalid. |
3642 | */ |
3643 | CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid = -1, |
3644 | /** |
3645 | * The type is an incomplete Type. |
3646 | */ |
3647 | CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete = -2, |
3648 | /** |
3649 | * The type is a dependent Type. |
3650 | */ |
3651 | CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent = -3, |
3652 | /** |
3653 | * The type is not a constant size type. |
3654 | */ |
3655 | CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize = -4, |
3656 | /** |
3657 | * The Field name is not valid for this record. |
3658 | */ |
3659 | CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName = -5, |
3660 | /** |
3661 | * The type is undeduced. |
3662 | */ |
3663 | CXTypeLayoutError_Undeduced = -6 |
3664 | }; |
3665 | |
3666 | /** |
3667 | * Return the alignment of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.alignof] |
3668 | * standard. |
3669 | * |
3670 | * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned. |
3671 | * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete |
3672 | * is returned. |
3673 | * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is |
3674 | * returned. |
3675 | * If the type declaration is not a constant size type, |
3676 | * CXTypeLayoutError_NotConstantSize is returned. |
3677 | */ |
3678 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getAlignOf(CXType T); |
3679 | |
3680 | /** |
3681 | * Return the class type of an member pointer type. |
3682 | * |
3683 | * If a non-member-pointer type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
3684 | */ |
3685 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getClassType(CXType T); |
3686 | |
3687 | /** |
3688 | * Return the size of a type in bytes as per C++[expr.sizeof] standard. |
3689 | * |
3690 | * If the type declaration is invalid, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned. |
3691 | * If the type declaration is an incomplete type, CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete |
3692 | * is returned. |
3693 | * If the type declaration is a dependent type, CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is |
3694 | * returned. |
3695 | */ |
3696 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getSizeOf(CXType T); |
3697 | |
3698 | /** |
3699 | * Return the offset of a field named S in a record of type T in bits |
3700 | * as it would be returned by __offsetof__ as per C++11[18.2p4] |
3701 | * |
3702 | * If the cursor is not a record field declaration, CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid |
3703 | * is returned. |
3704 | * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type, |
3705 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned. |
3706 | * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type, |
3707 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned. |
3708 | * If the field's name S is not found, |
3709 | * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned. |
3710 | */ |
3711 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Type_getOffsetOf(CXType T, const char *S); |
3712 | |
3713 | /** |
3714 | * Return the type that was modified by this attributed type. |
3715 | * |
3716 | * If the type is not an attributed type, an invalid type is returned. |
3717 | */ |
3718 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getModifiedType(CXType T); |
3719 | |
3720 | /** |
3721 | * Gets the type contained by this atomic type. |
3722 | * |
3723 | * If a non-atomic type is passed in, an invalid type is returned. |
3724 | */ |
3725 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getValueType(CXType CT); |
3726 | |
3727 | /** |
3728 | * Return the offset of the field represented by the Cursor. |
3729 | * |
3730 | * If the cursor is not a field declaration, -1 is returned. |
3731 | * If the cursor semantic parent is not a record field declaration, |
3732 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Invalid is returned. |
3733 | * If the field's type declaration is an incomplete type, |
3734 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Incomplete is returned. |
3735 | * If the field's type declaration is a dependent type, |
3736 | * CXTypeLayoutError_Dependent is returned. |
3737 | * If the field's name S is not found, |
3738 | * CXTypeLayoutError_InvalidFieldName is returned. |
3739 | */ |
3740 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_Cursor_getOffsetOfField(CXCursor C); |
3741 | |
3742 | /** |
3743 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous |
3744 | * tag or namespace |
3745 | */ |
3746 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymous(CXCursor C); |
3747 | |
3748 | /** |
3749 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents an anonymous record |
3750 | * declaration. |
3751 | */ |
3752 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isAnonymousRecordDecl(CXCursor C); |
3753 | |
3754 | /** |
3755 | * Determine whether the given cursor represents an inline namespace |
3756 | * declaration. |
3757 | */ |
3758 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isInlineNamespace(CXCursor C); |
3759 | |
3760 | enum CXRefQualifierKind { |
3761 | /** No ref-qualifier was provided. */ |
3762 | CXRefQualifier_None = 0, |
3763 | /** An lvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &). */ |
3764 | CXRefQualifier_LValue, |
3765 | /** An rvalue ref-qualifier was provided (\c &&). */ |
3766 | CXRefQualifier_RValue |
3767 | }; |
3768 | |
3769 | /** |
3770 | * Returns the number of template arguments for given template |
3771 | * specialization, or -1 if type \c T is not a template specialization. |
3772 | */ |
3773 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Type_getNumTemplateArguments(CXType T); |
3774 | |
3775 | /** |
3776 | * Returns the type template argument of a template class specialization |
3777 | * at given index. |
3778 | * |
3779 | * This function only returns template type arguments and does not handle |
3780 | * template template arguments or variadic packs. |
3781 | */ |
3782 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Type_getTemplateArgumentAsType(CXType T, |
3783 | unsigned i); |
3784 | |
3785 | /** |
3786 | * Retrieve the ref-qualifier kind of a function or method. |
3787 | * |
3788 | * The ref-qualifier is returned for C++ functions or methods. For other types |
3789 | * or non-C++ declarations, CXRefQualifier_None is returned. |
3790 | */ |
3791 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXRefQualifierKind clang_Type_getCXXRefQualifier(CXType T); |
3792 | |
3793 | /** |
3794 | * Returns 1 if the base class specified by the cursor with kind |
3795 | * CX_CXXBaseSpecifier is virtual. |
3796 | */ |
3797 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isVirtualBase(CXCursor); |
3798 | |
3799 | /** |
3800 | * Returns the offset in bits of a CX_CXXBaseSpecifier relative to the parent |
3801 | * class. |
3802 | * |
3803 | * Returns a small negative number if the offset cannot be computed. See |
3804 | * CXTypeLayoutError for error codes. |
3805 | */ |
3806 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_getOffsetOfBase(CXCursor Parent, CXCursor Base); |
3807 | |
3808 | /** |
3809 | * Represents the C++ access control level to a base class for a |
3810 | * cursor with kind CX_CXXBaseSpecifier. |
3811 | */ |
3812 | enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier { |
3813 | CX_CXXInvalidAccessSpecifier, |
3814 | CX_CXXPublic, |
3815 | CX_CXXProtected, |
3816 | CX_CXXPrivate |
3817 | }; |
3818 | |
3819 | /** |
3820 | * Returns the access control level for the referenced object. |
3821 | * |
3822 | * If the cursor refers to a C++ declaration, its access control level within |
3823 | * its parent scope is returned. Otherwise, if the cursor refers to a base |
3824 | * specifier or access specifier, the specifier itself is returned. |
3825 | */ |
3826 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_CXXAccessSpecifier clang_getCXXAccessSpecifier(CXCursor); |
3827 | |
3828 | /** |
3829 | * Represents the storage classes as declared in the source. CX_SC_Invalid |
3830 | * was added for the case that the passed cursor in not a declaration. |
3831 | */ |
3832 | enum CX_StorageClass { |
3833 | CX_SC_Invalid, |
3834 | CX_SC_None, |
3835 | CX_SC_Extern, |
3836 | CX_SC_Static, |
3837 | CX_SC_PrivateExtern, |
3838 | CX_SC_OpenCLWorkGroupLocal, |
3839 | CX_SC_Auto, |
3840 | CX_SC_Register |
3841 | }; |
3842 | |
3843 | /** |
3844 | * Represents a specific kind of binary operator which can appear at a cursor. |
3845 | */ |
3846 | enum CX_BinaryOperatorKind { |
3847 | CX_BO_Invalid = 0, |
3848 | CX_BO_PtrMemD = 1, |
3849 | CX_BO_PtrMemI = 2, |
3850 | CX_BO_Mul = 3, |
3851 | CX_BO_Div = 4, |
3852 | CX_BO_Rem = 5, |
3853 | CX_BO_Add = 6, |
3854 | CX_BO_Sub = 7, |
3855 | CX_BO_Shl = 8, |
3856 | CX_BO_Shr = 9, |
3857 | CX_BO_Cmp = 10, |
3858 | CX_BO_LT = 11, |
3859 | CX_BO_GT = 12, |
3860 | CX_BO_LE = 13, |
3861 | CX_BO_GE = 14, |
3862 | CX_BO_EQ = 15, |
3863 | CX_BO_NE = 16, |
3864 | CX_BO_And = 17, |
3865 | CX_BO_Xor = 18, |
3866 | CX_BO_Or = 19, |
3867 | CX_BO_LAnd = 20, |
3868 | CX_BO_LOr = 21, |
3869 | CX_BO_Assign = 22, |
3870 | CX_BO_MulAssign = 23, |
3871 | CX_BO_DivAssign = 24, |
3872 | CX_BO_RemAssign = 25, |
3873 | CX_BO_AddAssign = 26, |
3874 | CX_BO_SubAssign = 27, |
3875 | CX_BO_ShlAssign = 28, |
3876 | CX_BO_ShrAssign = 29, |
3877 | CX_BO_AndAssign = 30, |
3878 | CX_BO_XorAssign = 31, |
3879 | CX_BO_OrAssign = 32, |
3880 | CX_BO_Comma = 33, |
3881 | CX_BO_LAST = CX_BO_Comma |
3882 | }; |
3883 | |
3884 | /** |
3885 | * \brief Returns the operator code for the binary operator. |
3886 | * |
3887 | * @deprecated: use clang_getCursorBinaryOperatorKind instead. |
3888 | */ |
3889 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_BinaryOperatorKind |
3890 | clang_Cursor_getBinaryOpcode(CXCursor C); |
3891 | |
3892 | /** |
3893 | * \brief Returns a string containing the spelling of the binary operator. |
3894 | * |
3895 | * @deprecated: use clang_getBinaryOperatorKindSpelling instead |
3896 | */ |
3897 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
3898 | clang_Cursor_getBinaryOpcodeStr(enum CX_BinaryOperatorKind Op); |
3899 | |
3900 | /** |
3901 | * Returns the storage class for a function or variable declaration. |
3902 | * |
3903 | * If the passed in Cursor is not a function or variable declaration, |
3904 | * CX_SC_Invalid is returned else the storage class. |
3905 | */ |
3906 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CX_StorageClass clang_Cursor_getStorageClass(CXCursor); |
3907 | |
3908 | /** |
3909 | * Determine the number of overloaded declarations referenced by a |
3910 | * \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor. |
3911 | * |
3912 | * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried. |
3913 | * |
3914 | * \returns The number of overloaded declarations referenced by \c cursor. If it |
3915 | * is not a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor, returns 0. |
3916 | */ |
3917 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_getNumOverloadedDecls(CXCursor cursor); |
3918 | |
3919 | /** |
3920 | * Retrieve a cursor for one of the overloaded declarations referenced |
3921 | * by a \c CXCursor_OverloadedDeclRef cursor. |
3922 | * |
3923 | * \param cursor The cursor whose overloaded declarations are being queried. |
3924 | * |
3925 | * \param index The zero-based index into the set of overloaded declarations in |
3926 | * the cursor. |
3927 | * |
3928 | * \returns A cursor representing the declaration referenced by the given |
3929 | * \c cursor at the specified \c index. If the cursor does not have an |
3930 | * associated set of overloaded declarations, or if the index is out of bounds, |
3931 | * returns \c clang_getNullCursor(); |
3932 | */ |
3933 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getOverloadedDecl(CXCursor cursor, |
3934 | unsigned index); |
3935 | |
3936 | /** |
3937 | * @} |
3938 | */ |
3939 | |
3940 | /** |
3941 | * \defgroup CINDEX_ATTRIBUTES Information for attributes |
3942 | * |
3943 | * @{ |
3944 | */ |
3945 | |
3946 | /** |
3947 | * For cursors representing an iboutletcollection attribute, |
3948 | * this function returns the collection element type. |
3949 | * |
3950 | */ |
3951 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_getIBOutletCollectionType(CXCursor); |
3952 | |
3953 | /** |
3954 | * @} |
3955 | */ |
3956 | |
3957 | /** |
3958 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_TRAVERSAL Traversing the AST with cursors |
3959 | * |
3960 | * These routines provide the ability to traverse the abstract syntax tree |
3961 | * using cursors. |
3962 | * |
3963 | * @{ |
3964 | */ |
3965 | |
3966 | /** |
3967 | * Describes how the traversal of the children of a particular |
3968 | * cursor should proceed after visiting a particular child cursor. |
3969 | * |
3970 | * A value of this enumeration type should be returned by each |
3971 | * \c CXCursorVisitor to indicate how clang_visitChildren() proceed. |
3972 | */ |
3973 | enum CXChildVisitResult { |
3974 | /** |
3975 | * Terminates the cursor traversal. |
3976 | */ |
3977 | CXChildVisit_Break, |
3978 | /** |
3979 | * Continues the cursor traversal with the next sibling of |
3980 | * the cursor just visited, without visiting its children. |
3981 | */ |
3982 | CXChildVisit_Continue, |
3983 | /** |
3984 | * Recursively traverse the children of this cursor, using |
3985 | * the same visitor and client data. |
3986 | */ |
3987 | CXChildVisit_Recurse |
3988 | }; |
3989 | |
3990 | /** |
3991 | * Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal. |
3992 | * |
3993 | * This visitor function will be invoked for each cursor found by |
3994 | * clang_visitCursorChildren(). Its first argument is the cursor being |
3995 | * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor, |
3996 | * and its third argument is the client data provided to |
3997 | * clang_visitCursorChildren(). |
3998 | * |
3999 | * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values |
4000 | * to direct clang_visitCursorChildren(). |
4001 | */ |
4002 | typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (*CXCursorVisitor)(CXCursor cursor, |
4003 | CXCursor parent, |
4004 | CXClientData client_data); |
4005 | |
4006 | /** |
4007 | * Visit the children of a particular cursor. |
4008 | * |
4009 | * This function visits all the direct children of the given cursor, |
4010 | * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each |
4011 | * visited child. The traversal may be recursive, if the visitor returns |
4012 | * \c CXChildVisit_Recurse. The traversal may also be ended prematurely, if |
4013 | * the visitor returns \c CXChildVisit_Break. |
4014 | * |
4015 | * \param parent the cursor whose child may be visited. All kinds of |
4016 | * cursors can be visited, including invalid cursors (which, by |
4017 | * definition, have no children). |
4018 | * |
4019 | * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each |
4020 | * child of \p parent. |
4021 | * |
4022 | * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will |
4023 | * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked. |
4024 | * |
4025 | * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated |
4026 | * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXChildVisit_Break. |
4027 | */ |
4028 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitChildren(CXCursor parent, |
4029 | CXCursorVisitor visitor, |
4030 | CXClientData client_data); |
4031 | /** |
4032 | * Visitor invoked for each cursor found by a traversal. |
4033 | * |
4034 | * This visitor block will be invoked for each cursor found by |
4035 | * clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). Its first argument is the cursor being |
4036 | * visited, its second argument is the parent visitor for that cursor. |
4037 | * |
4038 | * The visitor should return one of the \c CXChildVisitResult values |
4039 | * to direct clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(). |
4040 | */ |
4041 | #if __has_feature(blocks) |
4042 | typedef enum CXChildVisitResult (^CXCursorVisitorBlock)(CXCursor cursor, |
4043 | CXCursor parent); |
4044 | #else |
4045 | typedef struct _CXChildVisitResult *CXCursorVisitorBlock; |
4046 | #endif |
4047 | |
4048 | /** |
4049 | * Visits the children of a cursor using the specified block. Behaves |
4050 | * identically to clang_visitChildren() in all other respects. |
4051 | */ |
4052 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
4053 | clang_visitChildrenWithBlock(CXCursor parent, CXCursorVisitorBlock block); |
4054 | |
4055 | /** |
4056 | * @} |
4057 | */ |
4058 | |
4059 | /** |
4060 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CURSOR_XREF Cross-referencing in the AST |
4061 | * |
4062 | * These routines provide the ability to determine references within and |
4063 | * across translation units, by providing the names of the entities referenced |
4064 | * by cursors, follow reference cursors to the declarations they reference, |
4065 | * and associate declarations with their definitions. |
4066 | * |
4067 | * @{ |
4068 | */ |
4069 | |
4070 | /** |
4071 | * Retrieve a Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) for the entity referenced |
4072 | * by the given cursor. |
4073 | * |
4074 | * A Unified Symbol Resolution (USR) is a string that identifies a particular |
4075 | * entity (function, class, variable, etc.) within a program. USRs can be |
4076 | * compared across translation units to determine, e.g., when references in |
4077 | * one translation refer to an entity defined in another translation unit. |
4078 | */ |
4079 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorUSR(CXCursor); |
4080 | |
4081 | /** |
4082 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C class. |
4083 | */ |
4084 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCClass(const char *class_name); |
4085 | |
4086 | /** |
4087 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C category. |
4088 | */ |
4089 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCCategory( |
4090 | const char *class_name, const char *category_name); |
4091 | |
4092 | /** |
4093 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C protocol. |
4094 | */ |
4095 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
4096 | clang_constructUSR_ObjCProtocol(const char *protocol_name); |
4097 | |
4098 | /** |
4099 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C instance variable and |
4100 | * the USR for its containing class. |
4101 | */ |
4102 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCIvar(const char *name, |
4103 | CXString classUSR); |
4104 | |
4105 | /** |
4106 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C method and |
4107 | * the USR for its containing class. |
4108 | */ |
4109 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCMethod(const char *name, |
4110 | unsigned isInstanceMethod, |
4111 | CXString classUSR); |
4112 | |
4113 | /** |
4114 | * Construct a USR for a specified Objective-C property and the USR |
4115 | * for its containing class. |
4116 | */ |
4117 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_constructUSR_ObjCProperty(const char *property, |
4118 | CXString classUSR); |
4119 | |
4120 | /** |
4121 | * Retrieve a name for the entity referenced by this cursor. |
4122 | */ |
4123 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorSpelling(CXCursor); |
4124 | |
4125 | /** |
4126 | * Retrieve a range for a piece that forms the cursors spelling name. |
4127 | * Most of the times there is only one range for the complete spelling but for |
4128 | * Objective-C methods and Objective-C message expressions, there are multiple |
4129 | * pieces for each selector identifier. |
4130 | * |
4131 | * \param pieceIndex the index of the spelling name piece. If this is greater |
4132 | * than the actual number of pieces, it will return a NULL (invalid) range. |
4133 | * |
4134 | * \param options Reserved. |
4135 | */ |
4136 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_Cursor_getSpellingNameRange( |
4137 | CXCursor, unsigned pieceIndex, unsigned options); |
4138 | |
4139 | /** |
4140 | * Opaque pointer representing a policy that controls pretty printing |
4141 | * for \c clang_getCursorPrettyPrinted. |
4142 | */ |
4143 | typedef void *CXPrintingPolicy; |
4144 | |
4145 | /** |
4146 | * Properties for the printing policy. |
4147 | * |
4148 | * See \c clang::PrintingPolicy for more information. |
4149 | */ |
4150 | enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty { |
4151 | CXPrintingPolicy_Indentation, |
4152 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressSpecifiers, |
4153 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressTagKeyword, |
4154 | CXPrintingPolicy_IncludeTagDefinition, |
4155 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressScope, |
4156 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressUnwrittenScope, |
4157 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressInitializers, |
4158 | CXPrintingPolicy_ConstantArraySizeAsWritten, |
4159 | CXPrintingPolicy_AnonymousTagLocations, |
4160 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressStrongLifetime, |
4161 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressLifetimeQualifiers, |
4162 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressTemplateArgsInCXXConstructors, |
4163 | CXPrintingPolicy_Bool, |
4164 | CXPrintingPolicy_Restrict, |
4165 | CXPrintingPolicy_Alignof, |
4166 | CXPrintingPolicy_UnderscoreAlignof, |
4167 | CXPrintingPolicy_UseVoidForZeroParams, |
4168 | CXPrintingPolicy_TerseOutput, |
4169 | CXPrintingPolicy_PolishForDeclaration, |
4170 | CXPrintingPolicy_Half, |
4171 | CXPrintingPolicy_MSWChar, |
4172 | CXPrintingPolicy_IncludeNewlines, |
4173 | CXPrintingPolicy_MSVCFormatting, |
4174 | CXPrintingPolicy_ConstantsAsWritten, |
4175 | CXPrintingPolicy_SuppressImplicitBase, |
4176 | CXPrintingPolicy_FullyQualifiedName, |
4177 | |
4178 | CXPrintingPolicy_LastProperty = CXPrintingPolicy_FullyQualifiedName |
4179 | }; |
4180 | |
4181 | /** |
4182 | * Get a property value for the given printing policy. |
4183 | */ |
4184 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
4185 | clang_PrintingPolicy_getProperty(CXPrintingPolicy Policy, |
4186 | enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty Property); |
4187 | |
4188 | /** |
4189 | * Set a property value for the given printing policy. |
4190 | */ |
4191 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void |
4192 | clang_PrintingPolicy_setProperty(CXPrintingPolicy Policy, |
4193 | enum CXPrintingPolicyProperty Property, |
4194 | unsigned Value); |
4195 | |
4196 | /** |
4197 | * Retrieve the default policy for the cursor. |
4198 | * |
4199 | * The policy should be released after use with \c |
4200 | * clang_PrintingPolicy_dispose. |
4201 | */ |
4202 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXPrintingPolicy clang_getCursorPrintingPolicy(CXCursor); |
4203 | |
4204 | /** |
4205 | * Release a printing policy. |
4206 | */ |
4207 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_PrintingPolicy_dispose(CXPrintingPolicy Policy); |
4208 | |
4209 | /** |
4210 | * Pretty print declarations. |
4211 | * |
4212 | * \param Cursor The cursor representing a declaration. |
4213 | * |
4214 | * \param Policy The policy to control the entities being printed. If |
4215 | * NULL, a default policy is used. |
4216 | * |
4217 | * \returns The pretty printed declaration or the empty string for |
4218 | * other cursors. |
4219 | */ |
4220 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorPrettyPrinted(CXCursor Cursor, |
4221 | CXPrintingPolicy Policy); |
4222 | |
4223 | /** |
4224 | * Pretty-print the underlying type using a custom printing policy. |
4225 | * |
4226 | * If the type is invalid, an empty string is returned. |
4227 | */ |
4228 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTypePrettyPrinted(CXType CT, |
4229 | CXPrintingPolicy cxPolicy); |
4230 | |
4231 | /** |
4232 | * Get the fully qualified name for a type. |
4233 | * |
4234 | * This includes full qualification of all template parameters. |
4235 | * |
4236 | * Policy - Further refine the type formatting |
4237 | * WithGlobalNsPrefix - If non-zero, function will prepend a '::' to qualified |
4238 | * names |
4239 | */ |
4240 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getFullyQualifiedName( |
4241 | CXType CT, CXPrintingPolicy Policy, unsigned WithGlobalNsPrefix); |
4242 | |
4243 | /** |
4244 | * Retrieve the display name for the entity referenced by this cursor. |
4245 | * |
4246 | * The display name contains extra information that helps identify the cursor, |
4247 | * such as the parameters of a function or template or the arguments of a |
4248 | * class template specialization. |
4249 | */ |
4250 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorDisplayName(CXCursor); |
4251 | |
4252 | /** For a cursor that is a reference, retrieve a cursor representing the |
4253 | * entity that it references. |
4254 | * |
4255 | * Reference cursors refer to other entities in the AST. For example, an |
4256 | * Objective-C superclass reference cursor refers to an Objective-C class. |
4257 | * This function produces the cursor for the Objective-C class from the |
4258 | * cursor for the superclass reference. If the input cursor is a declaration or |
4259 | * definition, it returns that declaration or definition unchanged. |
4260 | * Otherwise, returns the NULL cursor. |
4261 | */ |
4262 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorReferenced(CXCursor); |
4263 | |
4264 | /** |
4265 | * For a cursor that is either a reference to or a declaration |
4266 | * of some entity, retrieve a cursor that describes the definition of |
4267 | * that entity. |
4268 | * |
4269 | * Some entities can be declared multiple times within a translation |
4270 | * unit, but only one of those declarations can also be a |
4271 | * definition. For example, given: |
4272 | * |
4273 | * \code |
4274 | * int f(int, int); |
4275 | * int g(int x, int y) { return f(x, y); } |
4276 | * int f(int a, int b) { return a + b; } |
4277 | * int f(int, int); |
4278 | * \endcode |
4279 | * |
4280 | * there are three declarations of the function "f", but only the |
4281 | * second one is a definition. The clang_getCursorDefinition() |
4282 | * function will take any cursor pointing to a declaration of "f" |
4283 | * (the first or fourth lines of the example) or a cursor referenced |
4284 | * that uses "f" (the call to "f' inside "g") and will return a |
4285 | * declaration cursor pointing to the definition (the second "f" |
4286 | * declaration). |
4287 | * |
4288 | * If given a cursor for which there is no corresponding definition, |
4289 | * e.g., because there is no definition of that entity within this |
4290 | * translation unit, returns a NULL cursor. |
4291 | */ |
4292 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCursorDefinition(CXCursor); |
4293 | |
4294 | /** |
4295 | * Determine whether the declaration pointed to by this cursor |
4296 | * is also a definition of that entity. |
4297 | */ |
4298 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_isCursorDefinition(CXCursor); |
4299 | |
4300 | /** |
4301 | * Retrieve the canonical cursor corresponding to the given cursor. |
4302 | * |
4303 | * In the C family of languages, many kinds of entities can be declared several |
4304 | * times within a single translation unit. For example, a structure type can |
4305 | * be forward-declared (possibly multiple times) and later defined: |
4306 | * |
4307 | * \code |
4308 | * struct X; |
4309 | * struct X; |
4310 | * struct X { |
4311 | * int member; |
4312 | * }; |
4313 | * \endcode |
4314 | * |
4315 | * The declarations and the definition of \c X are represented by three |
4316 | * different cursors, all of which are declarations of the same underlying |
4317 | * entity. One of these cursor is considered the "canonical" cursor, which |
4318 | * is effectively the representative for the underlying entity. One can |
4319 | * determine if two cursors are declarations of the same underlying entity by |
4320 | * comparing their canonical cursors. |
4321 | * |
4322 | * \returns The canonical cursor for the entity referred to by the given cursor. |
4323 | */ |
4324 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getCanonicalCursor(CXCursor); |
4325 | |
4326 | /** |
4327 | * If the cursor points to a selector identifier in an Objective-C |
4328 | * method or message expression, this returns the selector index. |
4329 | * |
4330 | * After getting a cursor with #clang_getCursor, this can be called to |
4331 | * determine if the location points to a selector identifier. |
4332 | * |
4333 | * \returns The selector index if the cursor is an Objective-C method or message |
4334 | * expression and the cursor is pointing to a selector identifier, or -1 |
4335 | * otherwise. |
4336 | */ |
4337 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_getObjCSelectorIndex(CXCursor); |
4338 | |
4339 | /** |
4340 | * Given a cursor pointing to a C++ method call or an Objective-C |
4341 | * message, returns non-zero if the method/message is "dynamic", meaning: |
4342 | * |
4343 | * For a C++ method: the call is virtual. |
4344 | * For an Objective-C message: the receiver is an object instance, not 'super' |
4345 | * or a specific class. |
4346 | * |
4347 | * If the method/message is "static" or the cursor does not point to a |
4348 | * method/message, it will return zero. |
4349 | */ |
4350 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Cursor_isDynamicCall(CXCursor C); |
4351 | |
4352 | /** |
4353 | * Given a cursor pointing to an Objective-C message or property |
4354 | * reference, or C++ method call, returns the CXType of the receiver. |
4355 | */ |
4356 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXType clang_Cursor_getReceiverType(CXCursor C); |
4357 | |
4358 | /** |
4359 | * Property attributes for a \c CXCursor_ObjCPropertyDecl. |
4360 | */ |
4361 | typedef enum { |
4362 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_noattr = 0x00, |
4363 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_readonly = 0x01, |
4364 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_getter = 0x02, |
4365 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_assign = 0x04, |
4366 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_readwrite = 0x08, |
4367 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_retain = 0x10, |
4368 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_copy = 0x20, |
4369 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_nonatomic = 0x40, |
4370 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_setter = 0x80, |
4371 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_atomic = 0x100, |
4372 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_weak = 0x200, |
4373 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_strong = 0x400, |
4374 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_unsafe_unretained = 0x800, |
4375 | CXObjCPropertyAttr_class = 0x1000 |
4376 | } CXObjCPropertyAttrKind; |
4377 | |
4378 | /** |
4379 | * Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the |
4380 | * associated property attributes. The bits are formed from |
4381 | * \c CXObjCPropertyAttrKind. |
4382 | * |
4383 | * \param reserved Reserved for future use, pass 0. |
4384 | */ |
4385 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
4386 | clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyAttributes(CXCursor C, unsigned reserved); |
4387 | |
4388 | /** |
4389 | * Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the |
4390 | * name of the method that implements the getter. |
4391 | */ |
4392 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertyGetterName(CXCursor C); |
4393 | |
4394 | /** |
4395 | * Given a cursor that represents a property declaration, return the |
4396 | * name of the method that implements the setter, if any. |
4397 | */ |
4398 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getObjCPropertySetterName(CXCursor C); |
4399 | |
4400 | /** |
4401 | * 'Qualifiers' written next to the return and parameter types in |
4402 | * Objective-C method declarations. |
4403 | */ |
4404 | typedef enum { |
4405 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_None = 0x0, |
4406 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_In = 0x1, |
4407 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Inout = 0x2, |
4408 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Out = 0x4, |
4409 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Bycopy = 0x8, |
4410 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Byref = 0x10, |
4411 | CXObjCDeclQualifier_Oneway = 0x20 |
4412 | } CXObjCDeclQualifierKind; |
4413 | |
4414 | /** |
4415 | * Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or parameter |
4416 | * declaration, return the associated Objective-C qualifiers for the return |
4417 | * type or the parameter respectively. The bits are formed from |
4418 | * CXObjCDeclQualifierKind. |
4419 | */ |
4420 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getObjCDeclQualifiers(CXCursor C); |
4421 | |
4422 | /** |
4423 | * Given a cursor that represents an Objective-C method or property |
4424 | * declaration, return non-zero if the declaration was affected by "\@optional". |
4425 | * Returns zero if the cursor is not such a declaration or it is "\@required". |
4426 | */ |
4427 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isObjCOptional(CXCursor C); |
4428 | |
4429 | /** |
4430 | * Returns non-zero if the given cursor is a variadic function or method. |
4431 | */ |
4432 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isVariadic(CXCursor C); |
4433 | |
4434 | /** |
4435 | * Returns non-zero if the given cursor points to a symbol marked with |
4436 | * external_source_symbol attribute. |
4437 | * |
4438 | * \param language If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to |
4439 | * the 'language' string from the attribute. |
4440 | * |
4441 | * \param definedIn If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to |
4442 | * the 'definedIn' string from the attribute. |
4443 | * |
4444 | * \param isGenerated If non-NULL, and the attribute is present, will be set to |
4445 | * non-zero if the 'generated_declaration' is set in the attribute. |
4446 | */ |
4447 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isExternalSymbol(CXCursor C, |
4448 | CXString *language, |
4449 | CXString *definedIn, |
4450 | unsigned *isGenerated); |
4451 | |
4452 | /** |
4453 | * Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated |
4454 | * comment's source range. The range may include multiple consecutive comments |
4455 | * with whitespace in between. |
4456 | */ |
4457 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange (CXCursor C); |
4458 | |
4459 | /** |
4460 | * Given a cursor that represents a declaration, return the associated |
4461 | * comment text, including comment markers. |
4462 | */ |
4463 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString (CXCursor C); |
4464 | |
4465 | /** |
4466 | * Given a cursor that represents a documentable entity (e.g., |
4467 | * declaration), return the associated \paragraph; otherwise return the |
4468 | * first paragraph. |
4469 | */ |
4470 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString (CXCursor C); |
4471 | |
4472 | /** |
4473 | * @} |
4474 | */ |
4475 | |
4476 | /** \defgroup CINDEX_MANGLE Name Mangling API Functions |
4477 | * |
4478 | * @{ |
4479 | */ |
4480 | |
4481 | /** |
4482 | * Retrieve the CXString representing the mangled name of the cursor. |
4483 | */ |
4484 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getMangling(CXCursor); |
4485 | |
4486 | /** |
4487 | * Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the C++ |
4488 | * constructor or destructor at the cursor. |
4489 | */ |
4490 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getCXXManglings(CXCursor); |
4491 | |
4492 | /** |
4493 | * Retrieve the CXStrings representing the mangled symbols of the ObjC |
4494 | * class interface or implementation at the cursor. |
4495 | */ |
4496 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXStringSet *clang_Cursor_getObjCManglings(CXCursor); |
4497 | |
4498 | /** |
4499 | * @} |
4500 | */ |
4501 | |
4502 | /** |
4503 | * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Inline Assembly introspection |
4504 | * |
4505 | * The functions in this group provide access to information about GCC-style |
4506 | * inline assembly statements. |
4507 | * |
4508 | * @{ |
4509 | */ |
4510 | |
4511 | /** |
4512 | * Given a CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt cursor, return the assembly template string. |
4513 | * As per LLVM IR Assembly Template language, template placeholders for |
4514 | * inputs and outputs are either of the form $N where N is a decimal number |
4515 | * as an index into the input-output specification, |
4516 | * or ${N:M} where N is a decimal number also as an index into the |
4517 | * input-output specification and M is the template argument modifier. |
4518 | * The index N in both cases points into the the total inputs and outputs, |
4519 | * or more specifically, into the list of outputs followed by the inputs, |
4520 | * starting from index 0 as the first available template argument. |
4521 | * |
4522 | * This function also returns a valid empty string if the cursor does not point |
4523 | * at a GCC inline assembly block. |
4524 | * |
4525 | * Users are responsible for releasing the allocation of returned string via |
4526 | * \c clang_disposeString. |
4527 | */ |
4528 | |
4529 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getGCCAssemblyTemplate(CXCursor); |
4530 | |
4531 | /** |
4532 | * Given a CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt cursor, check if the assembly block has goto |
4533 | * labels. |
4534 | * This function also returns 0 if the cursor does not point at a GCC inline |
4535 | * assembly block. |
4536 | */ |
4537 | |
4538 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isGCCAssemblyHasGoto(CXCursor); |
4539 | |
4540 | /** |
4541 | * Given a CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt cursor, count the number of outputs. |
4542 | * This function also returns 0 if the cursor does not point at a GCC inline |
4543 | * assembly block. |
4544 | */ |
4545 | |
4546 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getGCCAssemblyNumOutputs(CXCursor); |
4547 | |
4548 | /** |
4549 | * Given a CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt cursor, count the number of inputs. |
4550 | * This function also returns 0 if the cursor does not point at a GCC inline |
4551 | * assembly block. |
4552 | */ |
4553 | |
4554 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getGCCAssemblyNumInputs(CXCursor); |
4555 | |
4556 | /** |
4557 | * Given a CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt cursor, get the constraint and expression cursor |
4558 | * to the Index-th input. |
4559 | * This function returns 1 when the cursor points at a GCC inline assembly |
4560 | * statement, `Index` is within bounds and both the `Constraint` and `Expr` are |
4561 | * not NULL. |
4562 | * Otherwise, this function returns 0 but leaves `Constraint` and `Expr` |
4563 | * intact. |
4564 | * |
4565 | * Users are responsible for releasing the allocation of `Constraint` via |
4566 | * \c clang_disposeString. |
4567 | */ |
4568 | |
4569 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getGCCAssemblyInput(CXCursor Cursor, |
4570 | unsigned Index, |
4571 | CXString *Constraint, |
4572 | CXCursor *Expr); |
4573 | |
4574 | /** |
4575 | * Given a CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt cursor, get the constraint and expression cursor |
4576 | * to the Index-th output. |
4577 | * This function returns 1 when the cursor points at a GCC inline assembly |
4578 | * statement, `Index` is within bounds and both the `Constraint` and `Expr` are |
4579 | * not NULL. |
4580 | * Otherwise, this function returns 0 but leaves `Constraint` and `Expr` |
4581 | * intact. |
4582 | * |
4583 | * Users are responsible for releasing the allocation of `Constraint` via |
4584 | * \c clang_disposeString. |
4585 | */ |
4586 | |
4587 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getGCCAssemblyOutput(CXCursor Cursor, |
4588 | unsigned Index, |
4589 | CXString *Constraint, |
4590 | CXCursor *Expr); |
4591 | |
4592 | /** |
4593 | * Given a CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt cursor, count the clobbers in it. |
4594 | * This function also returns 0 if the cursor does not point at a GCC inline |
4595 | * assembly block. |
4596 | */ |
4597 | |
4598 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_getGCCAssemblyNumClobbers(CXCursor Cursor); |
4599 | |
4600 | /** |
4601 | * Given a CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt cursor, get the Index-th clobber of it. |
4602 | * This function returns a valid empty string if the cursor does not point |
4603 | * at a GCC inline assembly block or `Index` is out of bounds. |
4604 | * |
4605 | * Users are responsible for releasing the allocation of returned string via |
4606 | * \c clang_disposeString. |
4607 | */ |
4608 | |
4609 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Cursor_getGCCAssemblyClobber(CXCursor Cursor, |
4610 | unsigned Index); |
4611 | |
4612 | /** |
4613 | * Given a CXCursor_GCCAsmStmt cursor, check if the inline assembly is |
4614 | * `volatile`. |
4615 | * This function returns 0 if the cursor does not point at a GCC inline |
4616 | * assembly block. |
4617 | */ |
4618 | |
4619 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Cursor_isGCCAssemblyVolatile(CXCursor Cursor); |
4620 | |
4621 | /** |
4622 | * @} |
4623 | */ |
4624 | |
4625 | /** |
4626 | * \defgroup CINDEX_MODULE Module introspection |
4627 | * |
4628 | * The functions in this group provide access to information about modules. |
4629 | * |
4630 | * @{ |
4631 | */ |
4632 | |
4633 | typedef void *CXModule; |
4634 | |
4635 | /** |
4636 | * Given a CXCursor_ModuleImportDecl cursor, return the associated module. |
4637 | */ |
4638 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Cursor_getModule(CXCursor C); |
4639 | |
4640 | /** |
4641 | * Given a CXFile header file, return the module that contains it, if one |
4642 | * exists. |
4643 | */ |
4644 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_getModuleForFile(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile); |
4645 | |
4646 | /** |
4647 | * \param Module a module object. |
4648 | * |
4649 | * \returns the module file where the provided module object came from. |
4650 | */ |
4651 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXFile clang_Module_getASTFile(CXModule Module); |
4652 | |
4653 | /** |
4654 | * \param Module a module object. |
4655 | * |
4656 | * \returns the parent of a sub-module or NULL if the given module is top-level, |
4657 | * e.g. for 'std.vector' it will return the 'std' module. |
4658 | */ |
4659 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXModule clang_Module_getParent(CXModule Module); |
4660 | |
4661 | /** |
4662 | * \param Module a module object. |
4663 | * |
4664 | * \returns the name of the module, e.g. for the 'std.vector' sub-module it |
4665 | * will return "vector". |
4666 | */ |
4667 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getName(CXModule Module); |
4668 | |
4669 | /** |
4670 | * \param Module a module object. |
4671 | * |
4672 | * \returns the full name of the module, e.g. "std.vector". |
4673 | */ |
4674 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_Module_getFullName(CXModule Module); |
4675 | |
4676 | /** |
4677 | * \param Module a module object. |
4678 | * |
4679 | * \returns non-zero if the module is a system one. |
4680 | */ |
4681 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_Module_isSystem(CXModule Module); |
4682 | |
4683 | /** |
4684 | * \param Module a module object. |
4685 | * |
4686 | * \returns the number of top level headers associated with this module. |
4687 | */ |
4688 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned (CXTranslationUnit, |
4689 | CXModule Module); |
4690 | |
4691 | /** |
4692 | * \param Module a module object. |
4693 | * |
4694 | * \param Index top level header index (zero-based). |
4695 | * |
4696 | * \returns the specified top level header associated with the module. |
4697 | */ |
4698 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
4699 | CXFile (CXTranslationUnit, CXModule Module, |
4700 | unsigned Index); |
4701 | |
4702 | /** |
4703 | * @} |
4704 | */ |
4705 | |
4706 | /** |
4707 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CPP C++ AST introspection |
4708 | * |
4709 | * The routines in this group provide access information in the ASTs specific |
4710 | * to C++ language features. |
4711 | * |
4712 | * @{ |
4713 | */ |
4714 | |
4715 | /** |
4716 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is a converting constructor. |
4717 | */ |
4718 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
4719 | clang_CXXConstructor_isConvertingConstructor(CXCursor C); |
4720 | |
4721 | /** |
4722 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is a copy constructor. |
4723 | */ |
4724 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isCopyConstructor(CXCursor C); |
4725 | |
4726 | /** |
4727 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is the default constructor. |
4728 | */ |
4729 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isDefaultConstructor(CXCursor C); |
4730 | |
4731 | /** |
4732 | * Determine if a C++ constructor is a move constructor. |
4733 | */ |
4734 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXConstructor_isMoveConstructor(CXCursor C); |
4735 | |
4736 | /** |
4737 | * Determine if a C++ field is declared 'mutable'. |
4738 | */ |
4739 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXField_isMutable(CXCursor C); |
4740 | |
4741 | /** |
4742 | * Determine if a C++ method is declared '= default'. |
4743 | */ |
4744 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isDefaulted(CXCursor C); |
4745 | |
4746 | /** |
4747 | * Determine if a C++ method is declared '= delete'. |
4748 | */ |
4749 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isDeleted(CXCursor C); |
4750 | |
4751 | /** |
4752 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
4753 | * pure virtual. |
4754 | */ |
4755 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isPureVirtual(CXCursor C); |
4756 | |
4757 | /** |
4758 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
4759 | * declared 'static'. |
4760 | */ |
4761 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isStatic(CXCursor C); |
4762 | |
4763 | /** |
4764 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
4765 | * explicitly declared 'virtual' or if it overrides a virtual method from |
4766 | * one of the base classes. |
4767 | */ |
4768 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isVirtual(CXCursor C); |
4769 | |
4770 | /** |
4771 | * Determine if a C++ member function is a copy-assignment operator, |
4772 | * returning 1 if such is the case and 0 otherwise. |
4773 | * |
4774 | * > A copy-assignment operator `X::operator=` is a non-static, |
4775 | * > non-template member function of _class_ `X` with exactly one |
4776 | * > parameter of type `X`, `X&`, `const X&`, `volatile X&` or `const |
4777 | * > volatile X&`. |
4778 | * |
4779 | * That is, for example, the `operator=` in: |
4780 | * |
4781 | * class Foo { |
4782 | * bool operator=(const volatile Foo&); |
4783 | * }; |
4784 | * |
4785 | * Is a copy-assignment operator, while the `operator=` in: |
4786 | * |
4787 | * class Bar { |
4788 | * bool operator=(const int&); |
4789 | * }; |
4790 | * |
4791 | * Is not. |
4792 | */ |
4793 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isCopyAssignmentOperator(CXCursor C); |
4794 | |
4795 | /** |
4796 | * Determine if a C++ member function is a move-assignment operator, |
4797 | * returning 1 if such is the case and 0 otherwise. |
4798 | * |
4799 | * > A move-assignment operator `X::operator=` is a non-static, |
4800 | * > non-template member function of _class_ `X` with exactly one |
4801 | * > parameter of type `X&&`, `const X&&`, `volatile X&&` or `const |
4802 | * > volatile X&&`. |
4803 | * |
4804 | * That is, for example, the `operator=` in: |
4805 | * |
4806 | * class Foo { |
4807 | * bool operator=(const volatile Foo&&); |
4808 | * }; |
4809 | * |
4810 | * Is a move-assignment operator, while the `operator=` in: |
4811 | * |
4812 | * class Bar { |
4813 | * bool operator=(const int&&); |
4814 | * }; |
4815 | * |
4816 | * Is not. |
4817 | */ |
4818 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isMoveAssignmentOperator(CXCursor C); |
4819 | |
4820 | /** |
4821 | * Determines if a C++ constructor or conversion function was declared |
4822 | * explicit, returning 1 if such is the case and 0 otherwise. |
4823 | * |
4824 | * Constructors or conversion functions are declared explicit through |
4825 | * the use of the explicit specifier. |
4826 | * |
4827 | * For example, the following constructor and conversion function are |
4828 | * not explicit as they lack the explicit specifier: |
4829 | * |
4830 | * class Foo { |
4831 | * Foo(); |
4832 | * operator int(); |
4833 | * }; |
4834 | * |
4835 | * While the following constructor and conversion function are |
4836 | * explicit as they are declared with the explicit specifier. |
4837 | * |
4838 | * class Foo { |
4839 | * explicit Foo(); |
4840 | * explicit operator int(); |
4841 | * }; |
4842 | * |
4843 | * This function will return 0 when given a cursor pointing to one of |
4844 | * the former declarations and it will return 1 for a cursor pointing |
4845 | * to the latter declarations. |
4846 | * |
4847 | * The explicit specifier allows the user to specify a |
4848 | * conditional compile-time expression whose value decides |
4849 | * whether the marked element is explicit or not. |
4850 | * |
4851 | * For example: |
4852 | * |
4853 | * constexpr bool foo(int i) { return i % 2 == 0; } |
4854 | * |
4855 | * class Foo { |
4856 | * explicit(foo(1)) Foo(); |
4857 | * explicit(foo(2)) operator int(); |
4858 | * } |
4859 | * |
4860 | * This function will return 0 for the constructor and 1 for |
4861 | * the conversion function. |
4862 | */ |
4863 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isExplicit(CXCursor C); |
4864 | |
4865 | /** |
4866 | * Determine if a C++ record is abstract, i.e. whether a class or struct |
4867 | * has a pure virtual member function. |
4868 | */ |
4869 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXRecord_isAbstract(CXCursor C); |
4870 | |
4871 | /** |
4872 | * Determine if an enum declaration refers to a scoped enum. |
4873 | */ |
4874 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_EnumDecl_isScoped(CXCursor C); |
4875 | |
4876 | /** |
4877 | * Determine if a C++ member function or member function template is |
4878 | * declared 'const'. |
4879 | */ |
4880 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_CXXMethod_isConst(CXCursor C); |
4881 | |
4882 | /** |
4883 | * Given a cursor that represents a template, determine |
4884 | * the cursor kind of the specializations would be generated by instantiating |
4885 | * the template. |
4886 | * |
4887 | * This routine can be used to determine what flavor of function template, |
4888 | * class template, or class template partial specialization is stored in the |
4889 | * cursor. For example, it can describe whether a class template cursor is |
4890 | * declared with "struct", "class" or "union". |
4891 | * |
4892 | * \param C The cursor to query. This cursor should represent a template |
4893 | * declaration. |
4894 | * |
4895 | * \returns The cursor kind of the specializations that would be generated |
4896 | * by instantiating the template \p C. If \p C is not a template, returns |
4897 | * \c CXCursor_NoDeclFound. |
4898 | */ |
4899 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCursorKind clang_getTemplateCursorKind(CXCursor C); |
4900 | |
4901 | /** |
4902 | * Given a cursor that may represent a specialization or instantiation |
4903 | * of a template, retrieve the cursor that represents the template that it |
4904 | * specializes or from which it was instantiated. |
4905 | * |
4906 | * This routine determines the template involved both for explicit |
4907 | * specializations of templates and for implicit instantiations of the template, |
4908 | * both of which are referred to as "specializations". For a class template |
4909 | * specialization (e.g., \c std::vector<bool>), this routine will return |
4910 | * either the primary template (\c std::vector) or, if the specialization was |
4911 | * instantiated from a class template partial specialization, the class template |
4912 | * partial specialization. For a class template partial specialization and a |
4913 | * function template specialization (including instantiations), this |
4914 | * this routine will return the specialized template. |
4915 | * |
4916 | * For members of a class template (e.g., member functions, member classes, or |
4917 | * static data members), returns the specialized or instantiated member. |
4918 | * Although not strictly "templates" in the C++ language, members of class |
4919 | * templates have the same notions of specializations and instantiations that |
4920 | * templates do, so this routine treats them similarly. |
4921 | * |
4922 | * \param C A cursor that may be a specialization of a template or a member |
4923 | * of a template. |
4924 | * |
4925 | * \returns If the given cursor is a specialization or instantiation of a |
4926 | * template or a member thereof, the template or member that it specializes or |
4927 | * from which it was instantiated. Otherwise, returns a NULL cursor. |
4928 | */ |
4929 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCursor clang_getSpecializedCursorTemplate(CXCursor C); |
4930 | |
4931 | /** |
4932 | * Given a cursor that references something else, return the source range |
4933 | * covering that reference. |
4934 | * |
4935 | * \param C A cursor pointing to a member reference, a declaration reference, or |
4936 | * an operator call. |
4937 | * \param NameFlags A bitset with three independent flags: |
4938 | * CXNameRange_WantQualifier, CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs, and |
4939 | * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece. |
4940 | * \param PieceIndex For contiguous names or when passing the flag |
4941 | * CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece, only one piece with index 0 is |
4942 | * available. When the CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece flag is not passed for a |
4943 | * non-contiguous names, this index can be used to retrieve the individual |
4944 | * pieces of the name. See also CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece. |
4945 | * |
4946 | * \returns The piece of the name pointed to by the given cursor. If there is no |
4947 | * name, or if the PieceIndex is out-of-range, a null-cursor will be returned. |
4948 | */ |
4949 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getCursorReferenceNameRange( |
4950 | CXCursor C, unsigned NameFlags, unsigned PieceIndex); |
4951 | |
4952 | enum CXNameRefFlags { |
4953 | /** |
4954 | * Include the nested-name-specifier, e.g. Foo:: in x.Foo::y, in the |
4955 | * range. |
4956 | */ |
4957 | CXNameRange_WantQualifier = 0x1, |
4958 | |
4959 | /** |
4960 | * Include the explicit template arguments, e.g. \<int> in x.f<int>, |
4961 | * in the range. |
4962 | */ |
4963 | CXNameRange_WantTemplateArgs = 0x2, |
4964 | |
4965 | /** |
4966 | * If the name is non-contiguous, return the full spanning range. |
4967 | * |
4968 | * Non-contiguous names occur in Objective-C when a selector with two or more |
4969 | * parameters is used, or in C++ when using an operator: |
4970 | * \code |
4971 | * [object doSomething:here withValue:there]; // Objective-C |
4972 | * return some_vector[1]; // C++ |
4973 | * \endcode |
4974 | */ |
4975 | CXNameRange_WantSinglePiece = 0x4 |
4976 | }; |
4977 | |
4978 | /** |
4979 | * @} |
4980 | */ |
4981 | |
4982 | /** |
4983 | * \defgroup CINDEX_LEX Token extraction and manipulation |
4984 | * |
4985 | * The routines in this group provide access to the tokens within a |
4986 | * translation unit, along with a semantic mapping of those tokens to |
4987 | * their corresponding cursors. |
4988 | * |
4989 | * @{ |
4990 | */ |
4991 | |
4992 | /** |
4993 | * Describes a kind of token. |
4994 | */ |
4995 | typedef enum CXTokenKind { |
4996 | /** |
4997 | * A token that contains some kind of punctuation. |
4998 | */ |
4999 | CXToken_Punctuation, |
5000 | |
5001 | /** |
5002 | * A language keyword. |
5003 | */ |
5004 | CXToken_Keyword, |
5005 | |
5006 | /** |
5007 | * An identifier (that is not a keyword). |
5008 | */ |
5009 | CXToken_Identifier, |
5010 | |
5011 | /** |
5012 | * A numeric, string, or character literal. |
5013 | */ |
5014 | CXToken_Literal, |
5015 | |
5016 | /** |
5017 | * A comment. |
5018 | */ |
5019 | |
5020 | } CXTokenKind; |
5021 | |
5022 | /** |
5023 | * Describes a single preprocessing token. |
5024 | */ |
5025 | typedef struct { |
5026 | unsigned int_data[4]; |
5027 | void *ptr_data; |
5028 | } CXToken; |
5029 | |
5030 | /** |
5031 | * Get the raw lexical token starting with the given location. |
5032 | * |
5033 | * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized. |
5034 | * |
5035 | * \param Location the source location with which the token starts. |
5036 | * |
5037 | * \returns The token starting with the given location or NULL if no such token |
5038 | * exist. The returned pointer must be freed with clang_disposeTokens before the |
5039 | * translation unit is destroyed. |
5040 | */ |
5041 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXToken *clang_getToken(CXTranslationUnit TU, |
5042 | CXSourceLocation Location); |
5043 | |
5044 | /** |
5045 | * Determine the kind of the given token. |
5046 | */ |
5047 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXTokenKind clang_getTokenKind(CXToken); |
5048 | |
5049 | /** |
5050 | * Determine the spelling of the given token. |
5051 | * |
5052 | * The spelling of a token is the textual representation of that token, e.g., |
5053 | * the text of an identifier or keyword. |
5054 | */ |
5055 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getTokenSpelling(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken); |
5056 | |
5057 | /** |
5058 | * Retrieve the source location of the given token. |
5059 | */ |
5060 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceLocation clang_getTokenLocation(CXTranslationUnit, |
5061 | CXToken); |
5062 | |
5063 | /** |
5064 | * Retrieve a source range that covers the given token. |
5065 | */ |
5066 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXSourceRange clang_getTokenExtent(CXTranslationUnit, CXToken); |
5067 | |
5068 | /** |
5069 | * Tokenize the source code described by the given range into raw |
5070 | * lexical tokens. |
5071 | * |
5072 | * \param TU the translation unit whose text is being tokenized. |
5073 | * |
5074 | * \param Range the source range in which text should be tokenized. All of the |
5075 | * tokens produced by tokenization will fall within this source range, |
5076 | * |
5077 | * \param Tokens this pointer will be set to point to the array of tokens |
5078 | * that occur within the given source range. The returned pointer must be |
5079 | * freed with clang_disposeTokens() before the translation unit is destroyed. |
5080 | * |
5081 | * \param NumTokens will be set to the number of tokens in the \c *Tokens |
5082 | * array. |
5083 | * |
5084 | */ |
5085 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_tokenize(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXSourceRange Range, |
5086 | CXToken **Tokens, unsigned *NumTokens); |
5087 | |
5088 | /** |
5089 | * Annotate the given set of tokens by providing cursors for each token |
5090 | * that can be mapped to a specific entity within the abstract syntax tree. |
5091 | * |
5092 | * This token-annotation routine is equivalent to invoking |
5093 | * clang_getCursor() for the source locations of each of the |
5094 | * tokens. The cursors provided are filtered, so that only those |
5095 | * cursors that have a direct correspondence to the token are |
5096 | * accepted. For example, given a function call \c f(x), |
5097 | * clang_getCursor() would provide the following cursors: |
5098 | * |
5099 | * * when the cursor is over the 'f', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'f'. |
5100 | * * when the cursor is over the '(' or the ')', a CallExpr referring to 'f'. |
5101 | * * when the cursor is over the 'x', a DeclRefExpr cursor referring to 'x'. |
5102 | * |
5103 | * Only the first and last of these cursors will occur within the |
5104 | * annotate, since the tokens "f" and "x' directly refer to a function |
5105 | * and a variable, respectively, but the parentheses are just a small |
5106 | * part of the full syntax of the function call expression, which is |
5107 | * not provided as an annotation. |
5108 | * |
5109 | * \param TU the translation unit that owns the given tokens. |
5110 | * |
5111 | * \param Tokens the set of tokens to annotate. |
5112 | * |
5113 | * \param NumTokens the number of tokens in \p Tokens. |
5114 | * |
5115 | * \param Cursors an array of \p NumTokens cursors, whose contents will be |
5116 | * replaced with the cursors corresponding to each token. |
5117 | */ |
5118 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_annotateTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXToken *Tokens, |
5119 | unsigned NumTokens, CXCursor *Cursors); |
5120 | |
5121 | /** |
5122 | * Free the given set of tokens. |
5123 | */ |
5124 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_disposeTokens(CXTranslationUnit TU, CXToken *Tokens, |
5125 | unsigned NumTokens); |
5126 | |
5127 | /** |
5128 | * @} |
5129 | */ |
5130 | |
5131 | /** |
5132 | * \defgroup CINDEX_DEBUG Debugging facilities |
5133 | * |
5134 | * These routines are used for testing and debugging, only, and should not |
5135 | * be relied upon. |
5136 | * |
5137 | * @{ |
5138 | */ |
5139 | |
5140 | /* for debug/testing */ |
5141 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCursorKindSpelling(enum CXCursorKind Kind); |
5142 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getDefinitionSpellingAndExtent( |
5143 | CXCursor, const char **startBuf, const char **endBuf, unsigned *startLine, |
5144 | unsigned *startColumn, unsigned *endLine, unsigned *endColumn); |
5145 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_enableStackTraces(void); |
5146 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_executeOnThread(void (*fn)(void *), void *user_data, |
5147 | unsigned stack_size); |
5148 | |
5149 | /** |
5150 | * @} |
5151 | */ |
5152 | |
5153 | /** |
5154 | * \defgroup CINDEX_CODE_COMPLET Code completion |
5155 | * |
5156 | * Code completion involves taking an (incomplete) source file, along with |
5157 | * knowledge of where the user is actively editing that file, and suggesting |
5158 | * syntactically- and semantically-valid constructs that the user might want to |
5159 | * use at that particular point in the source code. These data structures and |
5160 | * routines provide support for code completion. |
5161 | * |
5162 | * @{ |
5163 | */ |
5164 | |
5165 | /** |
5166 | * A semantic string that describes a code-completion result. |
5167 | * |
5168 | * A semantic string that describes the formatting of a code-completion |
5169 | * result as a single "template" of text that should be inserted into the |
5170 | * source buffer when a particular code-completion result is selected. |
5171 | * Each semantic string is made up of some number of "chunks", each of which |
5172 | * contains some text along with a description of what that text means, e.g., |
5173 | * the name of the entity being referenced, whether the text chunk is part of |
5174 | * the template, or whether it is a "placeholder" that the user should replace |
5175 | * with actual code,of a specific kind. See \c CXCompletionChunkKind for a |
5176 | * description of the different kinds of chunks. |
5177 | */ |
5178 | typedef void *CXCompletionString; |
5179 | |
5180 | /** |
5181 | * A single result of code completion. |
5182 | */ |
5183 | typedef struct { |
5184 | /** |
5185 | * The kind of entity that this completion refers to. |
5186 | * |
5187 | * The cursor kind will be a macro, keyword, or a declaration (one of the |
5188 | * *Decl cursor kinds), describing the entity that the completion is |
5189 | * referring to. |
5190 | * |
5191 | * \todo In the future, we would like to provide a full cursor, to allow |
5192 | * the client to extract additional information from declaration. |
5193 | */ |
5194 | enum CXCursorKind CursorKind; |
5195 | |
5196 | /** |
5197 | * The code-completion string that describes how to insert this |
5198 | * code-completion result into the editing buffer. |
5199 | */ |
5200 | CXCompletionString CompletionString; |
5201 | } CXCompletionResult; |
5202 | |
5203 | /** |
5204 | * Describes a single piece of text within a code-completion string. |
5205 | * |
5206 | * Each "chunk" within a code-completion string (\c CXCompletionString) is |
5207 | * either a piece of text with a specific "kind" that describes how that text |
5208 | * should be interpreted by the client or is another completion string. |
5209 | */ |
5210 | enum CXCompletionChunkKind { |
5211 | /** |
5212 | * A code-completion string that describes "optional" text that |
5213 | * could be a part of the template (but is not required). |
5214 | * |
5215 | * The Optional chunk is the only kind of chunk that has a code-completion |
5216 | * string for its representation, which is accessible via |
5217 | * \c clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString(). The code-completion string |
5218 | * describes an additional part of the template that is completely optional. |
5219 | * For example, optional chunks can be used to describe the placeholders for |
5220 | * arguments that match up with defaulted function parameters, e.g. given: |
5221 | * |
5222 | * \code |
5223 | * void f(int x, float y = 3.14, double z = 2.71828); |
5224 | * \endcode |
5225 | * |
5226 | * The code-completion string for this function would contain: |
5227 | * - a TypedText chunk for "f". |
5228 | * - a LeftParen chunk for "(". |
5229 | * - a Placeholder chunk for "int x" |
5230 | * - an Optional chunk containing the remaining defaulted arguments, e.g., |
5231 | * - a Comma chunk for "," |
5232 | * - a Placeholder chunk for "float y" |
5233 | * - an Optional chunk containing the last defaulted argument: |
5234 | * - a Comma chunk for "," |
5235 | * - a Placeholder chunk for "double z" |
5236 | * - a RightParen chunk for ")" |
5237 | * |
5238 | * There are many ways to handle Optional chunks. Two simple approaches are: |
5239 | * - Completely ignore optional chunks, in which case the template for the |
5240 | * function "f" would only include the first parameter ("int x"). |
5241 | * - Fully expand all optional chunks, in which case the template for the |
5242 | * function "f" would have all of the parameters. |
5243 | */ |
5244 | CXCompletionChunk_Optional, |
5245 | /** |
5246 | * Text that a user would be expected to type to get this |
5247 | * code-completion result. |
5248 | * |
5249 | * There will be exactly one "typed text" chunk in a semantic string, which |
5250 | * will typically provide the spelling of a keyword or the name of a |
5251 | * declaration that could be used at the current code point. Clients are |
5252 | * expected to filter the code-completion results based on the text in this |
5253 | * chunk. |
5254 | */ |
5255 | CXCompletionChunk_TypedText, |
5256 | /** |
5257 | * Text that should be inserted as part of a code-completion result. |
5258 | * |
5259 | * A "text" chunk represents text that is part of the template to be |
5260 | * inserted into user code should this particular code-completion result |
5261 | * be selected. |
5262 | */ |
5263 | CXCompletionChunk_Text, |
5264 | /** |
5265 | * Placeholder text that should be replaced by the user. |
5266 | * |
5267 | * A "placeholder" chunk marks a place where the user should insert text |
5268 | * into the code-completion template. For example, placeholders might mark |
5269 | * the function parameters for a function declaration, to indicate that the |
5270 | * user should provide arguments for each of those parameters. The actual |
5271 | * text in a placeholder is a suggestion for the text to display before |
5272 | * the user replaces the placeholder with real code. |
5273 | */ |
5274 | CXCompletionChunk_Placeholder, |
5275 | /** |
5276 | * Informative text that should be displayed but never inserted as |
5277 | * part of the template. |
5278 | * |
5279 | * An "informative" chunk contains annotations that can be displayed to |
5280 | * help the user decide whether a particular code-completion result is the |
5281 | * right option, but which is not part of the actual template to be inserted |
5282 | * by code completion. |
5283 | */ |
5284 | CXCompletionChunk_Informative, |
5285 | /** |
5286 | * Text that describes the current parameter when code-completion is |
5287 | * referring to function call, message send, or template specialization. |
5288 | * |
5289 | * A "current parameter" chunk occurs when code-completion is providing |
5290 | * information about a parameter corresponding to the argument at the |
5291 | * code-completion point. For example, given a function |
5292 | * |
5293 | * \code |
5294 | * int add(int x, int y); |
5295 | * \endcode |
5296 | * |
5297 | * and the source code \c add(, where the code-completion point is after the |
5298 | * "(", the code-completion string will contain a "current parameter" chunk |
5299 | * for "int x", indicating that the current argument will initialize that |
5300 | * parameter. After typing further, to \c add(17, (where the code-completion |
5301 | * point is after the ","), the code-completion string will contain a |
5302 | * "current parameter" chunk to "int y". |
5303 | */ |
5304 | CXCompletionChunk_CurrentParameter, |
5305 | /** |
5306 | * A left parenthesis ('('), used to initiate a function call or |
5307 | * signal the beginning of a function parameter list. |
5308 | */ |
5309 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftParen, |
5310 | /** |
5311 | * A right parenthesis (')'), used to finish a function call or |
5312 | * signal the end of a function parameter list. |
5313 | */ |
5314 | CXCompletionChunk_RightParen, |
5315 | /** |
5316 | * A left bracket ('['). |
5317 | */ |
5318 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftBracket, |
5319 | /** |
5320 | * A right bracket (']'). |
5321 | */ |
5322 | CXCompletionChunk_RightBracket, |
5323 | /** |
5324 | * A left brace ('{'). |
5325 | */ |
5326 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftBrace, |
5327 | /** |
5328 | * A right brace ('}'). |
5329 | */ |
5330 | CXCompletionChunk_RightBrace, |
5331 | /** |
5332 | * A left angle bracket ('<'). |
5333 | */ |
5334 | CXCompletionChunk_LeftAngle, |
5335 | /** |
5336 | * A right angle bracket ('>'). |
5337 | */ |
5338 | CXCompletionChunk_RightAngle, |
5339 | /** |
5340 | * A comma separator (','). |
5341 | */ |
5342 | CXCompletionChunk_Comma, |
5343 | /** |
5344 | * Text that specifies the result type of a given result. |
5345 | * |
5346 | * This special kind of informative chunk is not meant to be inserted into |
5347 | * the text buffer. Rather, it is meant to illustrate the type that an |
5348 | * expression using the given completion string would have. |
5349 | */ |
5350 | CXCompletionChunk_ResultType, |
5351 | /** |
5352 | * A colon (':'). |
5353 | */ |
5354 | CXCompletionChunk_Colon, |
5355 | /** |
5356 | * A semicolon (';'). |
5357 | */ |
5358 | CXCompletionChunk_SemiColon, |
5359 | /** |
5360 | * An '=' sign. |
5361 | */ |
5362 | CXCompletionChunk_Equal, |
5363 | /** |
5364 | * Horizontal space (' '). |
5365 | */ |
5366 | CXCompletionChunk_HorizontalSpace, |
5367 | /** |
5368 | * Vertical space ('\\n'), after which it is generally a good idea to |
5369 | * perform indentation. |
5370 | */ |
5371 | CXCompletionChunk_VerticalSpace |
5372 | }; |
5373 | |
5374 | /** |
5375 | * Determine the kind of a particular chunk within a completion string. |
5376 | * |
5377 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
5378 | * |
5379 | * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string. |
5380 | * |
5381 | * \returns the kind of the chunk at the index \c chunk_number. |
5382 | */ |
5383 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXCompletionChunkKind |
5384 | clang_getCompletionChunkKind(CXCompletionString completion_string, |
5385 | unsigned chunk_number); |
5386 | |
5387 | /** |
5388 | * Retrieve the text associated with a particular chunk within a |
5389 | * completion string. |
5390 | * |
5391 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
5392 | * |
5393 | * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string. |
5394 | * |
5395 | * \returns the text associated with the chunk at index \c chunk_number. |
5396 | */ |
5397 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionChunkText( |
5398 | CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned chunk_number); |
5399 | |
5400 | /** |
5401 | * Retrieve the completion string associated with a particular chunk |
5402 | * within a completion string. |
5403 | * |
5404 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
5405 | * |
5406 | * \param chunk_number the 0-based index of the chunk in the completion string. |
5407 | * |
5408 | * \returns the completion string associated with the chunk at index |
5409 | * \c chunk_number. |
5410 | */ |
5411 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString clang_getCompletionChunkCompletionString( |
5412 | CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned chunk_number); |
5413 | |
5414 | /** |
5415 | * Retrieve the number of chunks in the given code-completion string. |
5416 | */ |
5417 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
5418 | clang_getNumCompletionChunks(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
5419 | |
5420 | /** |
5421 | * Determine the priority of this code completion. |
5422 | * |
5423 | * The priority of a code completion indicates how likely it is that this |
5424 | * particular completion is the completion that the user will select. The |
5425 | * priority is selected by various internal heuristics. |
5426 | * |
5427 | * \param completion_string The completion string to query. |
5428 | * |
5429 | * \returns The priority of this completion string. Smaller values indicate |
5430 | * higher-priority (more likely) completions. |
5431 | */ |
5432 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
5433 | clang_getCompletionPriority(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
5434 | |
5435 | /** |
5436 | * Determine the availability of the entity that this code-completion |
5437 | * string refers to. |
5438 | * |
5439 | * \param completion_string The completion string to query. |
5440 | * |
5441 | * \returns The availability of the completion string. |
5442 | */ |
5443 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXAvailabilityKind |
5444 | clang_getCompletionAvailability(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
5445 | |
5446 | /** |
5447 | * Retrieve the number of annotations associated with the given |
5448 | * completion string. |
5449 | * |
5450 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
5451 | * |
5452 | * \returns the number of annotations associated with the given completion |
5453 | * string. |
5454 | */ |
5455 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
5456 | clang_getCompletionNumAnnotations(CXCompletionString completion_string); |
5457 | |
5458 | /** |
5459 | * Retrieve the annotation associated with the given completion string. |
5460 | * |
5461 | * \param completion_string the completion string to query. |
5462 | * |
5463 | * \param annotation_number the 0-based index of the annotation of the |
5464 | * completion string. |
5465 | * |
5466 | * \returns annotation string associated with the completion at index |
5467 | * \c annotation_number, or a NULL string if that annotation is not available. |
5468 | */ |
5469 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionAnnotation( |
5470 | CXCompletionString completion_string, unsigned annotation_number); |
5471 | |
5472 | /** |
5473 | * Retrieve the parent context of the given completion string. |
5474 | * |
5475 | * The parent context of a completion string is the semantic parent of |
5476 | * the declaration (if any) that the code completion represents. For example, |
5477 | * a code completion for an Objective-C method would have the method's class |
5478 | * or protocol as its context. |
5479 | * |
5480 | * \param completion_string The code completion string whose parent is |
5481 | * being queried. |
5482 | * |
5483 | * \param kind DEPRECATED: always set to CXCursor_NotImplemented if non-NULL. |
5484 | * |
5485 | * \returns The name of the completion parent, e.g., "NSObject" if |
5486 | * the completion string represents a method in the NSObject class. |
5487 | */ |
5488 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionParent( |
5489 | CXCompletionString completion_string, enum CXCursorKind *kind); |
5490 | |
5491 | /** |
5492 | * Retrieve the brief documentation comment attached to the declaration |
5493 | * that corresponds to the given completion string. |
5494 | */ |
5495 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
5496 | (CXCompletionString completion_string); |
5497 | |
5498 | /** |
5499 | * Retrieve a completion string for an arbitrary declaration or macro |
5500 | * definition cursor. |
5501 | * |
5502 | * \param cursor The cursor to query. |
5503 | * |
5504 | * \returns A non-context-sensitive completion string for declaration and macro |
5505 | * definition cursors, or NULL for other kinds of cursors. |
5506 | */ |
5507 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXCompletionString |
5508 | clang_getCursorCompletionString(CXCursor cursor); |
5509 | |
5510 | /** |
5511 | * Contains the results of code-completion. |
5512 | * |
5513 | * This data structure contains the results of code completion, as |
5514 | * produced by \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). Its contents must be freed by |
5515 | * \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults. |
5516 | */ |
5517 | typedef struct { |
5518 | /** |
5519 | * The code-completion results. |
5520 | */ |
5521 | CXCompletionResult *Results; |
5522 | |
5523 | /** |
5524 | * The number of code-completion results stored in the |
5525 | * \c Results array. |
5526 | */ |
5527 | unsigned NumResults; |
5528 | } CXCodeCompleteResults; |
5529 | |
5530 | /** |
5531 | * Retrieve the number of fix-its for the given completion index. |
5532 | * |
5533 | * Calling this makes sense only if CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts |
5534 | * option was set. |
5535 | * |
5536 | * \param results The structure keeping all completion results |
5537 | * |
5538 | * \param completion_index The index of the completion |
5539 | * |
5540 | * \return The number of fix-its which must be applied before the completion at |
5541 | * completion_index can be applied |
5542 | */ |
5543 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned |
5544 | clang_getCompletionNumFixIts(CXCodeCompleteResults *results, |
5545 | unsigned completion_index); |
5546 | |
5547 | /** |
5548 | * Fix-its that *must* be applied before inserting the text for the |
5549 | * corresponding completion. |
5550 | * |
5551 | * By default, clang_codeCompleteAt() only returns completions with empty |
5552 | * fix-its. Extra completions with non-empty fix-its should be explicitly |
5553 | * requested by setting CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts. |
5554 | * |
5555 | * For the clients to be able to compute position of the cursor after applying |
5556 | * fix-its, the following conditions are guaranteed to hold for |
5557 | * replacement_range of the stored fix-its: |
5558 | * - Ranges in the fix-its are guaranteed to never contain the completion |
5559 | * point (or identifier under completion point, if any) inside them, except |
5560 | * at the start or at the end of the range. |
5561 | * - If a fix-it range starts or ends with completion point (or starts or |
5562 | * ends after the identifier under completion point), it will contain at |
5563 | * least one character. It allows to unambiguously recompute completion |
5564 | * point after applying the fix-it. |
5565 | * |
5566 | * The intuition is that provided fix-its change code around the identifier we |
5567 | * complete, but are not allowed to touch the identifier itself or the |
5568 | * completion point. One example of completions with corrections are the ones |
5569 | * replacing '.' with '->' and vice versa: |
5570 | * |
5571 | * std::unique_ptr<std::vector<int>> vec_ptr; |
5572 | * In 'vec_ptr.^', one of the completions is 'push_back', it requires |
5573 | * replacing '.' with '->'. |
5574 | * In 'vec_ptr->^', one of the completions is 'release', it requires |
5575 | * replacing '->' with '.'. |
5576 | * |
5577 | * \param results The structure keeping all completion results |
5578 | * |
5579 | * \param completion_index The index of the completion |
5580 | * |
5581 | * \param fixit_index The index of the fix-it for the completion at |
5582 | * completion_index |
5583 | * |
5584 | * \param replacement_range The fix-it range that must be replaced before the |
5585 | * completion at completion_index can be applied |
5586 | * |
5587 | * \returns The fix-it string that must replace the code at replacement_range |
5588 | * before the completion at completion_index can be applied |
5589 | */ |
5590 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getCompletionFixIt( |
5591 | CXCodeCompleteResults *results, unsigned completion_index, |
5592 | unsigned fixit_index, CXSourceRange *replacement_range); |
5593 | |
5594 | /** |
5595 | * Flags that can be passed to \c clang_codeCompleteAt() to |
5596 | * modify its behavior. |
5597 | * |
5598 | * The enumerators in this enumeration can be bitwise-OR'd together to |
5599 | * provide multiple options to \c clang_codeCompleteAt(). |
5600 | */ |
5601 | enum CXCodeComplete_Flags { |
5602 | /** |
5603 | * Whether to include macros within the set of code |
5604 | * completions returned. |
5605 | */ |
5606 | CXCodeComplete_IncludeMacros = 0x01, |
5607 | |
5608 | /** |
5609 | * Whether to include code patterns for language constructs |
5610 | * within the set of code completions, e.g., for loops. |
5611 | */ |
5612 | CXCodeComplete_IncludeCodePatterns = 0x02, |
5613 | |
5614 | /** |
5615 | * Whether to include brief documentation within the set of code |
5616 | * completions returned. |
5617 | */ |
5618 | = 0x04, |
5619 | |
5620 | /** |
5621 | * Whether to speed up completion by omitting top- or namespace-level entities |
5622 | * defined in the preamble. There's no guarantee any particular entity is |
5623 | * omitted. This may be useful if the headers are indexed externally. |
5624 | */ |
5625 | CXCodeComplete_SkipPreamble = 0x08, |
5626 | |
5627 | /** |
5628 | * Whether to include completions with small |
5629 | * fix-its, e.g. change '.' to '->' on member access, etc. |
5630 | */ |
5631 | CXCodeComplete_IncludeCompletionsWithFixIts = 0x10 |
5632 | }; |
5633 | |
5634 | /** |
5635 | * Bits that represent the context under which completion is occurring. |
5636 | * |
5637 | * The enumerators in this enumeration may be bitwise-OR'd together if multiple |
5638 | * contexts are occurring simultaneously. |
5639 | */ |
5640 | enum CXCompletionContext { |
5641 | /** |
5642 | * The context for completions is unexposed, as only Clang results |
5643 | * should be included. (This is equivalent to having no context bits set.) |
5644 | */ |
5645 | CXCompletionContext_Unexposed = 0, |
5646 | |
5647 | /** |
5648 | * Completions for any possible type should be included in the results. |
5649 | */ |
5650 | CXCompletionContext_AnyType = 1 << 0, |
5651 | |
5652 | /** |
5653 | * Completions for any possible value (variables, function calls, etc.) |
5654 | * should be included in the results. |
5655 | */ |
5656 | CXCompletionContext_AnyValue = 1 << 1, |
5657 | /** |
5658 | * Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C object should |
5659 | * be included in the results. |
5660 | */ |
5661 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCObjectValue = 1 << 2, |
5662 | /** |
5663 | * Completions for values that resolve to an Objective-C selector |
5664 | * should be included in the results. |
5665 | */ |
5666 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorValue = 1 << 3, |
5667 | /** |
5668 | * Completions for values that resolve to a C++ class type should be |
5669 | * included in the results. |
5670 | */ |
5671 | CXCompletionContext_CXXClassTypeValue = 1 << 4, |
5672 | |
5673 | /** |
5674 | * Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the dot |
5675 | * operator should be included in the results. |
5676 | */ |
5677 | CXCompletionContext_DotMemberAccess = 1 << 5, |
5678 | /** |
5679 | * Completions for fields of the member being accessed using the arrow |
5680 | * operator should be included in the results. |
5681 | */ |
5682 | CXCompletionContext_ArrowMemberAccess = 1 << 6, |
5683 | /** |
5684 | * Completions for properties of the Objective-C object being accessed |
5685 | * using the dot operator should be included in the results. |
5686 | */ |
5687 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCPropertyAccess = 1 << 7, |
5688 | |
5689 | /** |
5690 | * Completions for enum tags should be included in the results. |
5691 | */ |
5692 | CXCompletionContext_EnumTag = 1 << 8, |
5693 | /** |
5694 | * Completions for union tags should be included in the results. |
5695 | */ |
5696 | CXCompletionContext_UnionTag = 1 << 9, |
5697 | /** |
5698 | * Completions for struct tags should be included in the results. |
5699 | */ |
5700 | CXCompletionContext_StructTag = 1 << 10, |
5701 | |
5702 | /** |
5703 | * Completions for C++ class names should be included in the results. |
5704 | */ |
5705 | CXCompletionContext_ClassTag = 1 << 11, |
5706 | /** |
5707 | * Completions for C++ namespaces and namespace aliases should be |
5708 | * included in the results. |
5709 | */ |
5710 | CXCompletionContext_Namespace = 1 << 12, |
5711 | /** |
5712 | * Completions for C++ nested name specifiers should be included in |
5713 | * the results. |
5714 | */ |
5715 | CXCompletionContext_NestedNameSpecifier = 1 << 13, |
5716 | |
5717 | /** |
5718 | * Completions for Objective-C interfaces (classes) should be included |
5719 | * in the results. |
5720 | */ |
5721 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCInterface = 1 << 14, |
5722 | /** |
5723 | * Completions for Objective-C protocols should be included in |
5724 | * the results. |
5725 | */ |
5726 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCProtocol = 1 << 15, |
5727 | /** |
5728 | * Completions for Objective-C categories should be included in |
5729 | * the results. |
5730 | */ |
5731 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCCategory = 1 << 16, |
5732 | /** |
5733 | * Completions for Objective-C instance messages should be included |
5734 | * in the results. |
5735 | */ |
5736 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage = 1 << 17, |
5737 | /** |
5738 | * Completions for Objective-C class messages should be included in |
5739 | * the results. |
5740 | */ |
5741 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage = 1 << 18, |
5742 | /** |
5743 | * Completions for Objective-C selector names should be included in |
5744 | * the results. |
5745 | */ |
5746 | CXCompletionContext_ObjCSelectorName = 1 << 19, |
5747 | |
5748 | /** |
5749 | * Completions for preprocessor macro names should be included in |
5750 | * the results. |
5751 | */ |
5752 | CXCompletionContext_MacroName = 1 << 20, |
5753 | |
5754 | /** |
5755 | * Natural language completions should be included in the results. |
5756 | */ |
5757 | CXCompletionContext_NaturalLanguage = 1 << 21, |
5758 | |
5759 | /** |
5760 | * #include file completions should be included in the results. |
5761 | */ |
5762 | CXCompletionContext_IncludedFile = 1 << 22, |
5763 | |
5764 | /** |
5765 | * The current context is unknown, so set all contexts. |
5766 | */ |
5767 | CXCompletionContext_Unknown = ((1 << 23) - 1) |
5768 | }; |
5769 | |
5770 | /** |
5771 | * Returns a default set of code-completion options that can be |
5772 | * passed to\c clang_codeCompleteAt(). |
5773 | */ |
5774 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions(void); |
5775 | |
5776 | /** |
5777 | * Perform code completion at a given location in a translation unit. |
5778 | * |
5779 | * This function performs code completion at a particular file, line, and |
5780 | * column within source code, providing results that suggest potential |
5781 | * code snippets based on the context of the completion. The basic model |
5782 | * for code completion is that Clang will parse a complete source file, |
5783 | * performing syntax checking up to the location where code-completion has |
5784 | * been requested. At that point, a special code-completion token is passed |
5785 | * to the parser, which recognizes this token and determines, based on the |
5786 | * current location in the C/Objective-C/C++ grammar and the state of |
5787 | * semantic analysis, what completions to provide. These completions are |
5788 | * returned via a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure. |
5789 | * |
5790 | * Code completion itself is meant to be triggered by the client when the |
5791 | * user types punctuation characters or whitespace, at which point the |
5792 | * code-completion location will coincide with the cursor. For example, if \c p |
5793 | * is a pointer, code-completion might be triggered after the "-" and then |
5794 | * after the ">" in \c p->. When the code-completion location is after the ">", |
5795 | * the completion results will provide, e.g., the members of the struct that |
5796 | * "p" points to. The client is responsible for placing the cursor at the |
5797 | * beginning of the token currently being typed, then filtering the results |
5798 | * based on the contents of the token. For example, when code-completing for |
5799 | * the expression \c p->get, the client should provide the location just after |
5800 | * the ">" (e.g., pointing at the "g") to this code-completion hook. Then, the |
5801 | * client can filter the results based on the current token text ("get"), only |
5802 | * showing those results that start with "get". The intent of this interface |
5803 | * is to separate the relatively high-latency acquisition of code-completion |
5804 | * results from the filtering of results on a per-character basis, which must |
5805 | * have a lower latency. |
5806 | * |
5807 | * \param TU The translation unit in which code-completion should |
5808 | * occur. The source files for this translation unit need not be |
5809 | * completely up-to-date (and the contents of those source files may |
5810 | * be overridden via \p unsaved_files). Cursors referring into the |
5811 | * translation unit may be invalidated by this invocation. |
5812 | * |
5813 | * \param complete_filename The name of the source file where code |
5814 | * completion should be performed. This filename may be any file |
5815 | * included in the translation unit. |
5816 | * |
5817 | * \param complete_line The line at which code-completion should occur. |
5818 | * |
5819 | * \param complete_column The column at which code-completion should occur. |
5820 | * Note that the column should point just after the syntactic construct that |
5821 | * initiated code completion, and not in the middle of a lexical token. |
5822 | * |
5823 | * \param unsaved_files the Files that have not yet been saved to disk |
5824 | * but may be required for parsing or code completion, including the |
5825 | * contents of those files. The contents and name of these files (as |
5826 | * specified by CXUnsavedFile) are copied when necessary, so the |
5827 | * client only needs to guarantee their validity until the call to |
5828 | * this function returns. |
5829 | * |
5830 | * \param num_unsaved_files The number of unsaved file entries in \p |
5831 | * unsaved_files. |
5832 | * |
5833 | * \param options Extra options that control the behavior of code |
5834 | * completion, expressed as a bitwise OR of the enumerators of the |
5835 | * CXCodeComplete_Flags enumeration. The |
5836 | * \c clang_defaultCodeCompleteOptions() function returns a default set |
5837 | * of code-completion options. |
5838 | * |
5839 | * \returns If successful, a new \c CXCodeCompleteResults structure |
5840 | * containing code-completion results, which should eventually be |
5841 | * freed with \c clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(). If code |
5842 | * completion fails, returns NULL. |
5843 | */ |
5844 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
5845 | CXCodeCompleteResults * |
5846 | clang_codeCompleteAt(CXTranslationUnit TU, const char *complete_filename, |
5847 | unsigned complete_line, unsigned complete_column, |
5848 | struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
5849 | unsigned num_unsaved_files, unsigned options); |
5850 | |
5851 | /** |
5852 | * Sort the code-completion results in case-insensitive alphabetical |
5853 | * order. |
5854 | * |
5855 | * \param Results The set of results to sort. |
5856 | * \param NumResults The number of results in \p Results. |
5857 | */ |
5858 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
5859 | void clang_sortCodeCompletionResults(CXCompletionResult *Results, |
5860 | unsigned NumResults); |
5861 | |
5862 | /** |
5863 | * Free the given set of code-completion results. |
5864 | */ |
5865 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
5866 | void clang_disposeCodeCompleteResults(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
5867 | |
5868 | /** |
5869 | * Determine the number of diagnostics produced prior to the |
5870 | * location where code completion was performed. |
5871 | */ |
5872 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
5873 | unsigned clang_codeCompleteGetNumDiagnostics(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
5874 | |
5875 | /** |
5876 | * Retrieve a diagnostic associated with the given code completion. |
5877 | * |
5878 | * \param Results the code completion results to query. |
5879 | * \param Index the zero-based diagnostic number to retrieve. |
5880 | * |
5881 | * \returns the requested diagnostic. This diagnostic must be freed |
5882 | * via a call to \c clang_disposeDiagnostic(). |
5883 | */ |
5884 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
5885 | CXDiagnostic clang_codeCompleteGetDiagnostic(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results, |
5886 | unsigned Index); |
5887 | |
5888 | /** |
5889 | * Determines what completions are appropriate for the context |
5890 | * the given code completion. |
5891 | * |
5892 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
5893 | * |
5894 | * \returns the kinds of completions that are appropriate for use |
5895 | * along with the given code completion results. |
5896 | */ |
5897 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
5898 | unsigned long long |
5899 | clang_codeCompleteGetContexts(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
5900 | |
5901 | /** |
5902 | * Returns the cursor kind for the container for the current code |
5903 | * completion context. The container is only guaranteed to be set for |
5904 | * contexts where a container exists (i.e. member accesses or Objective-C |
5905 | * message sends); if there is not a container, this function will return |
5906 | * CXCursor_InvalidCode. |
5907 | * |
5908 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
5909 | * |
5910 | * \param IsIncomplete on return, this value will be false if Clang has complete |
5911 | * information about the container. If Clang does not have complete |
5912 | * information, this value will be true. |
5913 | * |
5914 | * \returns the container kind, or CXCursor_InvalidCode if there is not a |
5915 | * container |
5916 | */ |
5917 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
5918 | enum CXCursorKind |
5919 | clang_codeCompleteGetContainerKind(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results, |
5920 | unsigned *IsIncomplete); |
5921 | |
5922 | /** |
5923 | * Returns the USR for the container for the current code completion |
5924 | * context. If there is not a container for the current context, this |
5925 | * function will return the empty string. |
5926 | * |
5927 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
5928 | * |
5929 | * \returns the USR for the container |
5930 | */ |
5931 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
5932 | CXString clang_codeCompleteGetContainerUSR(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
5933 | |
5934 | /** |
5935 | * Returns the currently-entered selector for an Objective-C message |
5936 | * send, formatted like "initWithFoo:bar:". Only guaranteed to return a |
5937 | * non-empty string for CXCompletionContext_ObjCInstanceMessage and |
5938 | * CXCompletionContext_ObjCClassMessage. |
5939 | * |
5940 | * \param Results the code completion results to query |
5941 | * |
5942 | * \returns the selector (or partial selector) that has been entered thus far |
5943 | * for an Objective-C message send. |
5944 | */ |
5945 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
5946 | CXString clang_codeCompleteGetObjCSelector(CXCodeCompleteResults *Results); |
5947 | |
5948 | /** |
5949 | * @} |
5950 | */ |
5951 | |
5952 | /** |
5953 | * \defgroup CINDEX_MISC Miscellaneous utility functions |
5954 | * |
5955 | * @{ |
5956 | */ |
5957 | |
5958 | /** |
5959 | * Return a version string, suitable for showing to a user, but not |
5960 | * intended to be parsed (the format is not guaranteed to be stable). |
5961 | */ |
5962 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString clang_getClangVersion(void); |
5963 | |
5964 | /** |
5965 | * Enable/disable crash recovery. |
5966 | * |
5967 | * \param isEnabled Flag to indicate if crash recovery is enabled. A non-zero |
5968 | * value enables crash recovery, while 0 disables it. |
5969 | */ |
5970 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_toggleCrashRecovery(unsigned isEnabled); |
5971 | |
5972 | /** |
5973 | * Visitor invoked for each file in a translation unit |
5974 | * (used with clang_getInclusions()). |
5975 | * |
5976 | * This visitor function will be invoked by clang_getInclusions() for each |
5977 | * file included (either at the top-level or by \#include directives) within |
5978 | * a translation unit. The first argument is the file being included, and |
5979 | * the second and third arguments provide the inclusion stack. The |
5980 | * array is sorted in order of immediate inclusion. For example, |
5981 | * the first element refers to the location that included 'included_file'. |
5982 | */ |
5983 | typedef void (*CXInclusionVisitor)(CXFile included_file, |
5984 | CXSourceLocation *inclusion_stack, |
5985 | unsigned include_len, |
5986 | CXClientData client_data); |
5987 | |
5988 | /** |
5989 | * Visit the set of preprocessor inclusions in a translation unit. |
5990 | * The visitor function is called with the provided data for every included |
5991 | * file. This does not include headers included by the PCH file (unless one |
5992 | * is inspecting the inclusions in the PCH file itself). |
5993 | */ |
5994 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_getInclusions(CXTranslationUnit tu, |
5995 | CXInclusionVisitor visitor, |
5996 | CXClientData client_data); |
5997 | |
5998 | typedef enum { |
5999 | CXEval_Int = 1, |
6000 | CXEval_Float = 2, |
6001 | CXEval_ObjCStrLiteral = 3, |
6002 | CXEval_StrLiteral = 4, |
6003 | CXEval_CFStr = 5, |
6004 | CXEval_Other = 6, |
6005 | |
6006 | CXEval_UnExposed = 0 |
6007 | |
6008 | } CXEvalResultKind; |
6009 | |
6010 | /** |
6011 | * Evaluation result of a cursor |
6012 | */ |
6013 | typedef void *CXEvalResult; |
6014 | |
6015 | /** |
6016 | * If cursor is a statement declaration tries to evaluate the |
6017 | * statement and if its variable, tries to evaluate its initializer, |
6018 | * into its corresponding type. |
6019 | * If it's an expression, tries to evaluate the expression. |
6020 | */ |
6021 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResult clang_Cursor_Evaluate(CXCursor C); |
6022 | |
6023 | /** |
6024 | * Returns the kind of the evaluated result. |
6025 | */ |
6026 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXEvalResultKind clang_EvalResult_getKind(CXEvalResult E); |
6027 | |
6028 | /** |
6029 | * Returns the evaluation result as integer if the |
6030 | * kind is Int. |
6031 | */ |
6032 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_EvalResult_getAsInt(CXEvalResult E); |
6033 | |
6034 | /** |
6035 | * Returns the evaluation result as a long long integer if the |
6036 | * kind is Int. This prevents overflows that may happen if the result is |
6037 | * returned with clang_EvalResult_getAsInt. |
6038 | */ |
6039 | CINDEX_LINKAGE long long clang_EvalResult_getAsLongLong(CXEvalResult E); |
6040 | |
6041 | /** |
6042 | * Returns a non-zero value if the kind is Int and the evaluation |
6043 | * result resulted in an unsigned integer. |
6044 | */ |
6045 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt(CXEvalResult E); |
6046 | |
6047 | /** |
6048 | * Returns the evaluation result as an unsigned integer if |
6049 | * the kind is Int and clang_EvalResult_isUnsignedInt is non-zero. |
6050 | */ |
6051 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned long long |
6052 | clang_EvalResult_getAsUnsigned(CXEvalResult E); |
6053 | |
6054 | /** |
6055 | * Returns the evaluation result as double if the |
6056 | * kind is double. |
6057 | */ |
6058 | CINDEX_LINKAGE double clang_EvalResult_getAsDouble(CXEvalResult E); |
6059 | |
6060 | /** |
6061 | * Returns the evaluation result as a constant string if the |
6062 | * kind is other than Int or float. User must not free this pointer, |
6063 | * instead call clang_EvalResult_dispose on the CXEvalResult returned |
6064 | * by clang_Cursor_Evaluate. |
6065 | */ |
6066 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const char *clang_EvalResult_getAsStr(CXEvalResult E); |
6067 | |
6068 | /** |
6069 | * Disposes the created Eval memory. |
6070 | */ |
6071 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_EvalResult_dispose(CXEvalResult E); |
6072 | /** |
6073 | * @} |
6074 | */ |
6075 | |
6076 | /** \defgroup CINDEX_HIGH Higher level API functions |
6077 | * |
6078 | * @{ |
6079 | */ |
6080 | |
6081 | enum CXVisitorResult { CXVisit_Break, CXVisit_Continue }; |
6082 | |
6083 | typedef struct CXCursorAndRangeVisitor { |
6084 | void *context; |
6085 | enum CXVisitorResult (*visit)(void *context, CXCursor, CXSourceRange); |
6086 | } CXCursorAndRangeVisitor; |
6087 | |
6088 | typedef enum { |
6089 | /** |
6090 | * Function returned successfully. |
6091 | */ |
6092 | CXResult_Success = 0, |
6093 | /** |
6094 | * One of the parameters was invalid for the function. |
6095 | */ |
6096 | CXResult_Invalid = 1, |
6097 | /** |
6098 | * The function was terminated by a callback (e.g. it returned |
6099 | * CXVisit_Break) |
6100 | */ |
6101 | CXResult_VisitBreak = 2 |
6102 | |
6103 | } CXResult; |
6104 | |
6105 | /** |
6106 | * Find references of a declaration in a specific file. |
6107 | * |
6108 | * \param cursor pointing to a declaration or a reference of one. |
6109 | * |
6110 | * \param file to search for references. |
6111 | * |
6112 | * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for |
6113 | * each reference found. |
6114 | * The CXSourceRange will point inside the file; if the reference is inside |
6115 | * a macro (and not a macro argument) the CXSourceRange will be invalid. |
6116 | * |
6117 | * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators. |
6118 | */ |
6119 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findReferencesInFile( |
6120 | CXCursor cursor, CXFile file, CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor); |
6121 | |
6122 | /** |
6123 | * Find #import/#include directives in a specific file. |
6124 | * |
6125 | * \param TU translation unit containing the file to query. |
6126 | * |
6127 | * \param file to search for #import/#include directives. |
6128 | * |
6129 | * \param visitor callback that will receive pairs of CXCursor/CXSourceRange for |
6130 | * each directive found. |
6131 | * |
6132 | * \returns one of the CXResult enumerators. |
6133 | */ |
6134 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXResult clang_findIncludesInFile( |
6135 | CXTranslationUnit TU, CXFile file, CXCursorAndRangeVisitor visitor); |
6136 | |
6137 | #if __has_feature(blocks) |
6138 | typedef enum CXVisitorResult (^CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock)(CXCursor, |
6139 | CXSourceRange); |
6140 | #else |
6141 | typedef struct _CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock *CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock; |
6142 | #endif |
6143 | |
6144 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
6145 | CXResult clang_findReferencesInFileWithBlock(CXCursor, CXFile, |
6146 | CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock); |
6147 | |
6148 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
6149 | CXResult clang_findIncludesInFileWithBlock(CXTranslationUnit, CXFile, |
6150 | CXCursorAndRangeVisitorBlock); |
6151 | |
6152 | /** |
6153 | * The client's data object that is associated with a CXFile. |
6154 | */ |
6155 | typedef void *CXIdxClientFile; |
6156 | |
6157 | /** |
6158 | * The client's data object that is associated with a semantic entity. |
6159 | */ |
6160 | typedef void *CXIdxClientEntity; |
6161 | |
6162 | /** |
6163 | * The client's data object that is associated with a semantic container |
6164 | * of entities. |
6165 | */ |
6166 | typedef void *CXIdxClientContainer; |
6167 | |
6168 | /** |
6169 | * The client's data object that is associated with an AST file (PCH |
6170 | * or module). |
6171 | */ |
6172 | typedef void *CXIdxClientASTFile; |
6173 | |
6174 | /** |
6175 | * Source location passed to index callbacks. |
6176 | */ |
6177 | typedef struct { |
6178 | void *ptr_data[2]; |
6179 | unsigned int_data; |
6180 | } CXIdxLoc; |
6181 | |
6182 | /** |
6183 | * Data for ppIncludedFile callback. |
6184 | */ |
6185 | typedef struct { |
6186 | /** |
6187 | * Location of '#' in the \#include/\#import directive. |
6188 | */ |
6189 | CXIdxLoc hashLoc; |
6190 | /** |
6191 | * Filename as written in the \#include/\#import directive. |
6192 | */ |
6193 | const char *filename; |
6194 | /** |
6195 | * The actual file that the \#include/\#import directive resolved to. |
6196 | */ |
6197 | CXFile file; |
6198 | int isImport; |
6199 | int isAngled; |
6200 | /** |
6201 | * Non-zero if the directive was automatically turned into a module |
6202 | * import. |
6203 | */ |
6204 | int isModuleImport; |
6205 | } CXIdxIncludedFileInfo; |
6206 | |
6207 | /** |
6208 | * Data for IndexerCallbacks#importedASTFile. |
6209 | */ |
6210 | typedef struct { |
6211 | /** |
6212 | * Top level AST file containing the imported PCH, module or submodule. |
6213 | */ |
6214 | CXFile file; |
6215 | /** |
6216 | * The imported module or NULL if the AST file is a PCH. |
6217 | */ |
6218 | CXModule module; |
6219 | /** |
6220 | * Location where the file is imported. Applicable only for modules. |
6221 | */ |
6222 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
6223 | /** |
6224 | * Non-zero if an inclusion directive was automatically turned into |
6225 | * a module import. Applicable only for modules. |
6226 | */ |
6227 | int isImplicit; |
6228 | |
6229 | } CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo; |
6230 | |
6231 | typedef enum { |
6232 | CXIdxEntity_Unexposed = 0, |
6233 | CXIdxEntity_Typedef = 1, |
6234 | CXIdxEntity_Function = 2, |
6235 | CXIdxEntity_Variable = 3, |
6236 | CXIdxEntity_Field = 4, |
6237 | CXIdxEntity_EnumConstant = 5, |
6238 | |
6239 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCClass = 6, |
6240 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCProtocol = 7, |
6241 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCCategory = 8, |
6242 | |
6243 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCInstanceMethod = 9, |
6244 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCClassMethod = 10, |
6245 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCProperty = 11, |
6246 | CXIdxEntity_ObjCIvar = 12, |
6247 | |
6248 | CXIdxEntity_Enum = 13, |
6249 | CXIdxEntity_Struct = 14, |
6250 | CXIdxEntity_Union = 15, |
6251 | |
6252 | CXIdxEntity_CXXClass = 16, |
6253 | CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespace = 17, |
6254 | CXIdxEntity_CXXNamespaceAlias = 18, |
6255 | CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticVariable = 19, |
6256 | CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod = 20, |
6257 | CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod = 21, |
6258 | CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor = 22, |
6259 | CXIdxEntity_CXXDestructor = 23, |
6260 | CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction = 24, |
6261 | CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias = 25, |
6262 | CXIdxEntity_CXXInterface = 26, |
6263 | CXIdxEntity_CXXConcept = 27 |
6264 | |
6265 | } CXIdxEntityKind; |
6266 | |
6267 | typedef enum { |
6268 | CXIdxEntityLang_None = 0, |
6269 | CXIdxEntityLang_C = 1, |
6270 | CXIdxEntityLang_ObjC = 2, |
6271 | CXIdxEntityLang_CXX = 3, |
6272 | CXIdxEntityLang_Swift = 4 |
6273 | } CXIdxEntityLanguage; |
6274 | |
6275 | /** |
6276 | * Extra C++ template information for an entity. This can apply to: |
6277 | * CXIdxEntity_Function |
6278 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXClass |
6279 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXStaticMethod |
6280 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXInstanceMethod |
6281 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXConstructor |
6282 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXConversionFunction |
6283 | * CXIdxEntity_CXXTypeAlias |
6284 | */ |
6285 | typedef enum { |
6286 | CXIdxEntity_NonTemplate = 0, |
6287 | CXIdxEntity_Template = 1, |
6288 | CXIdxEntity_TemplatePartialSpecialization = 2, |
6289 | CXIdxEntity_TemplateSpecialization = 3 |
6290 | } CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind; |
6291 | |
6292 | typedef enum { |
6293 | CXIdxAttr_Unexposed = 0, |
6294 | CXIdxAttr_IBAction = 1, |
6295 | CXIdxAttr_IBOutlet = 2, |
6296 | CXIdxAttr_IBOutletCollection = 3 |
6297 | } CXIdxAttrKind; |
6298 | |
6299 | typedef struct { |
6300 | CXIdxAttrKind kind; |
6301 | CXCursor cursor; |
6302 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
6303 | } CXIdxAttrInfo; |
6304 | |
6305 | typedef struct { |
6306 | CXIdxEntityKind kind; |
6307 | CXIdxEntityCXXTemplateKind templateKind; |
6308 | CXIdxEntityLanguage lang; |
6309 | const char *name; |
6310 | const char *USR; |
6311 | CXCursor cursor; |
6312 | const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes; |
6313 | unsigned numAttributes; |
6314 | } CXIdxEntityInfo; |
6315 | |
6316 | typedef struct { |
6317 | CXCursor cursor; |
6318 | } CXIdxContainerInfo; |
6319 | |
6320 | typedef struct { |
6321 | const CXIdxAttrInfo *attrInfo; |
6322 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass; |
6323 | CXCursor classCursor; |
6324 | CXIdxLoc classLoc; |
6325 | } CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo; |
6326 | |
6327 | typedef enum { CXIdxDeclFlag_Skipped = 0x1 } CXIdxDeclInfoFlags; |
6328 | |
6329 | typedef struct { |
6330 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *entityInfo; |
6331 | CXCursor cursor; |
6332 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
6333 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *semanticContainer; |
6334 | /** |
6335 | * Generally same as #semanticContainer but can be different in |
6336 | * cases like out-of-line C++ member functions. |
6337 | */ |
6338 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *lexicalContainer; |
6339 | int isRedeclaration; |
6340 | int isDefinition; |
6341 | int isContainer; |
6342 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *declAsContainer; |
6343 | /** |
6344 | * Whether the declaration exists in code or was created implicitly |
6345 | * by the compiler, e.g. implicit Objective-C methods for properties. |
6346 | */ |
6347 | int isImplicit; |
6348 | const CXIdxAttrInfo *const *attributes; |
6349 | unsigned numAttributes; |
6350 | |
6351 | unsigned flags; |
6352 | |
6353 | } CXIdxDeclInfo; |
6354 | |
6355 | typedef enum { |
6356 | CXIdxObjCContainer_ForwardRef = 0, |
6357 | CXIdxObjCContainer_Interface = 1, |
6358 | CXIdxObjCContainer_Implementation = 2 |
6359 | } CXIdxObjCContainerKind; |
6360 | |
6361 | typedef struct { |
6362 | const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo; |
6363 | CXIdxObjCContainerKind kind; |
6364 | } CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo; |
6365 | |
6366 | typedef struct { |
6367 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *base; |
6368 | CXCursor cursor; |
6369 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
6370 | } CXIdxBaseClassInfo; |
6371 | |
6372 | typedef struct { |
6373 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *protocol; |
6374 | CXCursor cursor; |
6375 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
6376 | } CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo; |
6377 | |
6378 | typedef struct { |
6379 | const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefInfo *const *protocols; |
6380 | unsigned numProtocols; |
6381 | } CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo; |
6382 | |
6383 | typedef struct { |
6384 | const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo; |
6385 | const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *superInfo; |
6386 | const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols; |
6387 | } CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo; |
6388 | |
6389 | typedef struct { |
6390 | const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo *containerInfo; |
6391 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *objcClass; |
6392 | CXCursor classCursor; |
6393 | CXIdxLoc classLoc; |
6394 | const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo *protocols; |
6395 | } CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo; |
6396 | |
6397 | typedef struct { |
6398 | const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo; |
6399 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *getter; |
6400 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *setter; |
6401 | } CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo; |
6402 | |
6403 | typedef struct { |
6404 | const CXIdxDeclInfo *declInfo; |
6405 | const CXIdxBaseClassInfo *const *bases; |
6406 | unsigned numBases; |
6407 | } CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo; |
6408 | |
6409 | /** |
6410 | * Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference. |
6411 | * |
6412 | * This may be deprecated in a future version as this duplicates |
6413 | * the \c CXSymbolRole_Implicit bit in \c CXSymbolRole. |
6414 | */ |
6415 | typedef enum { |
6416 | /** |
6417 | * The entity is referenced directly in user's code. |
6418 | */ |
6419 | CXIdxEntityRef_Direct = 1, |
6420 | /** |
6421 | * An implicit reference, e.g. a reference of an Objective-C method |
6422 | * via the dot syntax. |
6423 | */ |
6424 | CXIdxEntityRef_Implicit = 2 |
6425 | } CXIdxEntityRefKind; |
6426 | |
6427 | /** |
6428 | * Roles that are attributed to symbol occurrences. |
6429 | * |
6430 | * Internal: this currently mirrors low 9 bits of clang::index::SymbolRole with |
6431 | * higher bits zeroed. These high bits may be exposed in the future. |
6432 | */ |
6433 | typedef enum { |
6434 | CXSymbolRole_None = 0, |
6435 | CXSymbolRole_Declaration = 1 << 0, |
6436 | CXSymbolRole_Definition = 1 << 1, |
6437 | CXSymbolRole_Reference = 1 << 2, |
6438 | CXSymbolRole_Read = 1 << 3, |
6439 | CXSymbolRole_Write = 1 << 4, |
6440 | CXSymbolRole_Call = 1 << 5, |
6441 | CXSymbolRole_Dynamic = 1 << 6, |
6442 | CXSymbolRole_AddressOf = 1 << 7, |
6443 | CXSymbolRole_Implicit = 1 << 8 |
6444 | } CXSymbolRole; |
6445 | |
6446 | /** |
6447 | * Data for IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference. |
6448 | */ |
6449 | typedef struct { |
6450 | CXIdxEntityRefKind kind; |
6451 | /** |
6452 | * Reference cursor. |
6453 | */ |
6454 | CXCursor cursor; |
6455 | CXIdxLoc loc; |
6456 | /** |
6457 | * The entity that gets referenced. |
6458 | */ |
6459 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *referencedEntity; |
6460 | /** |
6461 | * Immediate "parent" of the reference. For example: |
6462 | * |
6463 | * \code |
6464 | * Foo *var; |
6465 | * \endcode |
6466 | * |
6467 | * The parent of reference of type 'Foo' is the variable 'var'. |
6468 | * For references inside statement bodies of functions/methods, |
6469 | * the parentEntity will be the function/method. |
6470 | */ |
6471 | const CXIdxEntityInfo *parentEntity; |
6472 | /** |
6473 | * Lexical container context of the reference. |
6474 | */ |
6475 | const CXIdxContainerInfo *container; |
6476 | /** |
6477 | * Sets of symbol roles of the reference. |
6478 | */ |
6479 | CXSymbolRole role; |
6480 | } CXIdxEntityRefInfo; |
6481 | |
6482 | /** |
6483 | * A group of callbacks used by #clang_indexSourceFile and |
6484 | * #clang_indexTranslationUnit. |
6485 | */ |
6486 | typedef struct { |
6487 | /** |
6488 | * Called periodically to check whether indexing should be aborted. |
6489 | * Should return 0 to continue, and non-zero to abort. |
6490 | */ |
6491 | int (*abortQuery)(CXClientData client_data, void *reserved); |
6492 | |
6493 | /** |
6494 | * Called at the end of indexing; passes the complete diagnostic set. |
6495 | */ |
6496 | void (*diagnostic)(CXClientData client_data, CXDiagnosticSet, void *reserved); |
6497 | |
6498 | CXIdxClientFile (*enteredMainFile)(CXClientData client_data, CXFile mainFile, |
6499 | void *reserved); |
6500 | |
6501 | /** |
6502 | * Called when a file gets \#included/\#imported. |
6503 | */ |
6504 | CXIdxClientFile (*ppIncludedFile)(CXClientData client_data, |
6505 | const CXIdxIncludedFileInfo *); |
6506 | |
6507 | /** |
6508 | * Called when a AST file (PCH or module) gets imported. |
6509 | * |
6510 | * AST files will not get indexed (there will not be callbacks to index all |
6511 | * the entities in an AST file). The recommended action is that, if the AST |
6512 | * file is not already indexed, to initiate a new indexing job specific to |
6513 | * the AST file. |
6514 | */ |
6515 | CXIdxClientASTFile (*importedASTFile)(CXClientData client_data, |
6516 | const CXIdxImportedASTFileInfo *); |
6517 | |
6518 | /** |
6519 | * Called at the beginning of indexing a translation unit. |
6520 | */ |
6521 | CXIdxClientContainer (*startedTranslationUnit)(CXClientData client_data, |
6522 | void *reserved); |
6523 | |
6524 | void (*indexDeclaration)(CXClientData client_data, const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
6525 | |
6526 | /** |
6527 | * Called to index a reference of an entity. |
6528 | */ |
6529 | void (*indexEntityReference)(CXClientData client_data, |
6530 | const CXIdxEntityRefInfo *); |
6531 | |
6532 | } IndexerCallbacks; |
6533 | |
6534 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_index_isEntityObjCContainerKind(CXIdxEntityKind); |
6535 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCContainerDeclInfo * |
6536 | clang_index_getObjCContainerDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
6537 | |
6538 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCInterfaceDeclInfo * |
6539 | clang_index_getObjCInterfaceDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
6540 | |
6541 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
6542 | const CXIdxObjCCategoryDeclInfo * |
6543 | clang_index_getObjCCategoryDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
6544 | |
6545 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCProtocolRefListInfo * |
6546 | clang_index_getObjCProtocolRefListInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
6547 | |
6548 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxObjCPropertyDeclInfo * |
6549 | clang_index_getObjCPropertyDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
6550 | |
6551 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo * |
6552 | clang_index_getIBOutletCollectionAttrInfo(const CXIdxAttrInfo *); |
6553 | |
6554 | CINDEX_LINKAGE const CXIdxCXXClassDeclInfo * |
6555 | clang_index_getCXXClassDeclInfo(const CXIdxDeclInfo *); |
6556 | |
6557 | /** |
6558 | * For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a |
6559 | * container. |
6560 | */ |
6561 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientContainer |
6562 | clang_index_getClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *); |
6563 | |
6564 | /** |
6565 | * For setting a custom CXIdxClientContainer attached to a |
6566 | * container. |
6567 | */ |
6568 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_index_setClientContainer(const CXIdxContainerInfo *, |
6569 | CXIdxClientContainer); |
6570 | |
6571 | /** |
6572 | * For retrieving a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity. |
6573 | */ |
6574 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIdxClientEntity |
6575 | clang_index_getClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *); |
6576 | |
6577 | /** |
6578 | * For setting a custom CXIdxClientEntity attached to an entity. |
6579 | */ |
6580 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_index_setClientEntity(const CXIdxEntityInfo *, |
6581 | CXIdxClientEntity); |
6582 | |
6583 | /** |
6584 | * An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple |
6585 | * translation units. |
6586 | */ |
6587 | typedef void *CXIndexAction; |
6588 | |
6589 | /** |
6590 | * An indexing action/session, to be applied to one or multiple |
6591 | * translation units. |
6592 | * |
6593 | * \param CIdx The index object with which the index action will be associated. |
6594 | */ |
6595 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXIndexAction clang_IndexAction_create(CXIndex CIdx); |
6596 | |
6597 | /** |
6598 | * Destroy the given index action. |
6599 | * |
6600 | * The index action must not be destroyed until all of the translation units |
6601 | * created within that index action have been destroyed. |
6602 | */ |
6603 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_IndexAction_dispose(CXIndexAction); |
6604 | |
6605 | typedef enum { |
6606 | /** |
6607 | * Used to indicate that no special indexing options are needed. |
6608 | */ |
6609 | CXIndexOpt_None = 0x0, |
6610 | |
6611 | /** |
6612 | * Used to indicate that IndexerCallbacks#indexEntityReference should |
6613 | * be invoked for only one reference of an entity per source file that does |
6614 | * not also include a declaration/definition of the entity. |
6615 | */ |
6616 | CXIndexOpt_SuppressRedundantRefs = 0x1, |
6617 | |
6618 | /** |
6619 | * Function-local symbols should be indexed. If this is not set |
6620 | * function-local symbols will be ignored. |
6621 | */ |
6622 | CXIndexOpt_IndexFunctionLocalSymbols = 0x2, |
6623 | |
6624 | /** |
6625 | * Implicit function/class template instantiations should be indexed. |
6626 | * If this is not set, implicit instantiations will be ignored. |
6627 | */ |
6628 | CXIndexOpt_IndexImplicitTemplateInstantiations = 0x4, |
6629 | |
6630 | /** |
6631 | * Suppress all compiler warnings when parsing for indexing. |
6632 | */ |
6633 | CXIndexOpt_SuppressWarnings = 0x8, |
6634 | |
6635 | /** |
6636 | * Skip a function/method body that was already parsed during an |
6637 | * indexing session associated with a \c CXIndexAction object. |
6638 | * Bodies in system headers are always skipped. |
6639 | */ |
6640 | CXIndexOpt_SkipParsedBodiesInSession = 0x10 |
6641 | |
6642 | } CXIndexOptFlags; |
6643 | |
6644 | /** |
6645 | * Index the given source file and the translation unit corresponding |
6646 | * to that file via callbacks implemented through #IndexerCallbacks. |
6647 | * |
6648 | * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will |
6649 | * be passed to the invoked callbacks. |
6650 | * |
6651 | * \param index_callbacks Pointer to indexing callbacks that the client |
6652 | * implements. |
6653 | * |
6654 | * \param index_callbacks_size Size of #IndexerCallbacks structure that gets |
6655 | * passed in index_callbacks. |
6656 | * |
6657 | * \param index_options A bitmask of options that affects how indexing is |
6658 | * performed. This should be a bitwise OR of the CXIndexOpt_XXX flags. |
6659 | * |
6660 | * \param[out] out_TU pointer to store a \c CXTranslationUnit that can be |
6661 | * reused after indexing is finished. Set to \c NULL if you do not require it. |
6662 | * |
6663 | * \returns 0 on success or if there were errors from which the compiler could |
6664 | * recover. If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns |
6665 | * a non-zero \c CXErrorCode. |
6666 | * |
6667 | * The rest of the parameters are the same as #clang_parseTranslationUnit. |
6668 | */ |
6669 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFile( |
6670 | CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks, |
6671 | unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options, |
6672 | const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args, |
6673 | int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
6674 | unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options); |
6675 | |
6676 | /** |
6677 | * Same as clang_indexSourceFile but requires a full command line |
6678 | * for \c command_line_args including argv[0]. This is useful if the standard |
6679 | * library paths are relative to the binary. |
6680 | */ |
6681 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int clang_indexSourceFileFullArgv( |
6682 | CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks, |
6683 | unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options, |
6684 | const char *source_filename, const char *const *command_line_args, |
6685 | int num_command_line_args, struct CXUnsavedFile *unsaved_files, |
6686 | unsigned num_unsaved_files, CXTranslationUnit *out_TU, unsigned TU_options); |
6687 | |
6688 | /** |
6689 | * Index the given translation unit via callbacks implemented through |
6690 | * #IndexerCallbacks. |
6691 | * |
6692 | * The order of callback invocations is not guaranteed to be the same as |
6693 | * when indexing a source file. The high level order will be: |
6694 | * |
6695 | * -Preprocessor callbacks invocations |
6696 | * -Declaration/reference callbacks invocations |
6697 | * -Diagnostic callback invocations |
6698 | * |
6699 | * The parameters are the same as #clang_indexSourceFile. |
6700 | * |
6701 | * \returns If there is a failure from which there is no recovery, returns |
6702 | * non-zero, otherwise returns 0. |
6703 | */ |
6704 | CINDEX_LINKAGE int ( |
6705 | CXIndexAction, CXClientData client_data, IndexerCallbacks *index_callbacks, |
6706 | unsigned index_callbacks_size, unsigned index_options, CXTranslationUnit); |
6707 | |
6708 | /** |
6709 | * Retrieve the CXIdxFile, file, line, column, and offset represented by |
6710 | * the given CXIdxLoc. |
6711 | * |
6712 | * If the location refers into a macro expansion, retrieves the |
6713 | * location of the macro expansion and if it refers into a macro argument |
6714 | * retrieves the location of the argument. |
6715 | */ |
6716 | CINDEX_LINKAGE void clang_indexLoc_getFileLocation(CXIdxLoc loc, |
6717 | CXIdxClientFile *indexFile, |
6718 | CXFile *file, unsigned *line, |
6719 | unsigned *column, |
6720 | unsigned *offset); |
6721 | |
6722 | /** |
6723 | * Retrieve the CXSourceLocation represented by the given CXIdxLoc. |
6724 | */ |
6725 | CINDEX_LINKAGE |
6726 | CXSourceLocation clang_indexLoc_getCXSourceLocation(CXIdxLoc loc); |
6727 | |
6728 | /** |
6729 | * Visitor invoked for each field found by a traversal. |
6730 | * |
6731 | * This visitor function will be invoked for each field found by |
6732 | * \c clang_Type_visitFields. Its first argument is the cursor being |
6733 | * visited, its second argument is the client data provided to |
6734 | * \c clang_Type_visitFields. |
6735 | * |
6736 | * The visitor should return one of the \c CXVisitorResult values |
6737 | * to direct \c clang_Type_visitFields. |
6738 | */ |
6739 | typedef enum CXVisitorResult (*CXFieldVisitor)(CXCursor C, |
6740 | CXClientData client_data); |
6741 | |
6742 | /** |
6743 | * Visit the fields of a particular type. |
6744 | * |
6745 | * This function visits all the direct fields of the given cursor, |
6746 | * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each |
6747 | * visited field. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if |
6748 | * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break. |
6749 | * |
6750 | * \param T the record type whose field may be visited. |
6751 | * |
6752 | * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each |
6753 | * field of \p T. |
6754 | * |
6755 | * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will |
6756 | * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked. |
6757 | * |
6758 | * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated |
6759 | * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break. |
6760 | */ |
6761 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_Type_visitFields(CXType T, CXFieldVisitor visitor, |
6762 | CXClientData client_data); |
6763 | |
6764 | /** |
6765 | * Visit the base classes of a type. |
6766 | * |
6767 | * This function visits all the direct base classes of a the given cursor, |
6768 | * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each |
6769 | * visited base. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if |
6770 | * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break. |
6771 | * |
6772 | * \param T the record type whose field may be visited. |
6773 | * |
6774 | * \param visitor the visitor function that will be invoked for each |
6775 | * field of \p T. |
6776 | * |
6777 | * \param client_data pointer data supplied by the client, which will |
6778 | * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked. |
6779 | * |
6780 | * \returns a non-zero value if the traversal was terminated |
6781 | * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break. |
6782 | */ |
6783 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitCXXBaseClasses(CXType T, |
6784 | CXFieldVisitor visitor, |
6785 | CXClientData client_data); |
6786 | |
6787 | /** |
6788 | * Visit the class methods of a type. |
6789 | * |
6790 | * This function visits all the methods of the given cursor, |
6791 | * invoking the given \p visitor function with the cursors of each |
6792 | * visited method. The traversal may be ended prematurely, if |
6793 | * the visitor returns \c CXFieldVisit_Break. |
6794 | * |
6795 | * \param T The record type whose field may be visited. |
6796 | * |
6797 | * \param visitor The visitor function that will be invoked for each |
6798 | * field of \p T. |
6799 | * |
6800 | * \param client_data Pointer data supplied by the client, which will |
6801 | * be passed to the visitor each time it is invoked. |
6802 | * |
6803 | * \returns A non-zero value if the traversal was terminated |
6804 | * prematurely by the visitor returning \c CXFieldVisit_Break. |
6805 | */ |
6806 | CINDEX_LINKAGE unsigned clang_visitCXXMethods(CXType T, CXFieldVisitor visitor, |
6807 | CXClientData client_data); |
6808 | |
6809 | /** |
6810 | * Describes the kind of binary operators. |
6811 | */ |
6812 | enum CXBinaryOperatorKind { |
6813 | /** This value describes cursors which are not binary operators. */ |
6814 | CXBinaryOperator_Invalid = 0, |
6815 | /** C++ Pointer - to - member operator. */ |
6816 | CXBinaryOperator_PtrMemD = 1, |
6817 | /** C++ Pointer - to - member operator. */ |
6818 | CXBinaryOperator_PtrMemI = 2, |
6819 | /** Multiplication operator. */ |
6820 | CXBinaryOperator_Mul = 3, |
6821 | /** Division operator. */ |
6822 | CXBinaryOperator_Div = 4, |
6823 | /** Remainder operator. */ |
6824 | CXBinaryOperator_Rem = 5, |
6825 | /** Addition operator. */ |
6826 | CXBinaryOperator_Add = 6, |
6827 | /** Subtraction operator. */ |
6828 | CXBinaryOperator_Sub = 7, |
6829 | /** Bitwise shift left operator. */ |
6830 | CXBinaryOperator_Shl = 8, |
6831 | /** Bitwise shift right operator. */ |
6832 | CXBinaryOperator_Shr = 9, |
6833 | /** C++ three-way comparison (spaceship) operator. */ |
6834 | CXBinaryOperator_Cmp = 10, |
6835 | /** Less than operator. */ |
6836 | CXBinaryOperator_LT = 11, |
6837 | /** Greater than operator. */ |
6838 | CXBinaryOperator_GT = 12, |
6839 | /** Less or equal operator. */ |
6840 | CXBinaryOperator_LE = 13, |
6841 | /** Greater or equal operator. */ |
6842 | CXBinaryOperator_GE = 14, |
6843 | /** Equal operator. */ |
6844 | CXBinaryOperator_EQ = 15, |
6845 | /** Not equal operator. */ |
6846 | CXBinaryOperator_NE = 16, |
6847 | /** Bitwise AND operator. */ |
6848 | CXBinaryOperator_And = 17, |
6849 | /** Bitwise XOR operator. */ |
6850 | CXBinaryOperator_Xor = 18, |
6851 | /** Bitwise OR operator. */ |
6852 | CXBinaryOperator_Or = 19, |
6853 | /** Logical AND operator. */ |
6854 | CXBinaryOperator_LAnd = 20, |
6855 | /** Logical OR operator. */ |
6856 | CXBinaryOperator_LOr = 21, |
6857 | /** Assignment operator. */ |
6858 | CXBinaryOperator_Assign = 22, |
6859 | /** Multiplication assignment operator. */ |
6860 | CXBinaryOperator_MulAssign = 23, |
6861 | /** Division assignment operator. */ |
6862 | CXBinaryOperator_DivAssign = 24, |
6863 | /** Remainder assignment operator. */ |
6864 | CXBinaryOperator_RemAssign = 25, |
6865 | /** Addition assignment operator. */ |
6866 | CXBinaryOperator_AddAssign = 26, |
6867 | /** Subtraction assignment operator. */ |
6868 | CXBinaryOperator_SubAssign = 27, |
6869 | /** Bitwise shift left assignment operator. */ |
6870 | CXBinaryOperator_ShlAssign = 28, |
6871 | /** Bitwise shift right assignment operator. */ |
6872 | CXBinaryOperator_ShrAssign = 29, |
6873 | /** Bitwise AND assignment operator. */ |
6874 | CXBinaryOperator_AndAssign = 30, |
6875 | /** Bitwise XOR assignment operator. */ |
6876 | CXBinaryOperator_XorAssign = 31, |
6877 | /** Bitwise OR assignment operator. */ |
6878 | CXBinaryOperator_OrAssign = 32, |
6879 | /** Comma operator. */ |
6880 | CXBinaryOperator_Comma = 33, |
6881 | CXBinaryOperator_Last = CXBinaryOperator_Comma |
6882 | }; |
6883 | |
6884 | /** |
6885 | * Retrieve the spelling of a given CXBinaryOperatorKind. |
6886 | */ |
6887 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
6888 | clang_getBinaryOperatorKindSpelling(enum CXBinaryOperatorKind kind); |
6889 | |
6890 | /** |
6891 | * Retrieve the binary operator kind of this cursor. |
6892 | * |
6893 | * If this cursor is not a binary operator then returns Invalid. |
6894 | */ |
6895 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXBinaryOperatorKind |
6896 | clang_getCursorBinaryOperatorKind(CXCursor cursor); |
6897 | |
6898 | /** |
6899 | * Describes the kind of unary operators. |
6900 | */ |
6901 | enum CXUnaryOperatorKind { |
6902 | /** This value describes cursors which are not unary operators. */ |
6903 | CXUnaryOperator_Invalid, |
6904 | /** Postfix increment operator. */ |
6905 | CXUnaryOperator_PostInc, |
6906 | /** Postfix decrement operator. */ |
6907 | CXUnaryOperator_PostDec, |
6908 | /** Prefix increment operator. */ |
6909 | CXUnaryOperator_PreInc, |
6910 | /** Prefix decrement operator. */ |
6911 | CXUnaryOperator_PreDec, |
6912 | /** Address of operator. */ |
6913 | CXUnaryOperator_AddrOf, |
6914 | /** Dereference operator. */ |
6915 | CXUnaryOperator_Deref, |
6916 | /** Plus operator. */ |
6917 | CXUnaryOperator_Plus, |
6918 | /** Minus operator. */ |
6919 | CXUnaryOperator_Minus, |
6920 | /** Not operator. */ |
6921 | CXUnaryOperator_Not, |
6922 | /** LNot operator. */ |
6923 | CXUnaryOperator_LNot, |
6924 | /** "__real expr" operator. */ |
6925 | CXUnaryOperator_Real, |
6926 | /** "__imag expr" operator. */ |
6927 | CXUnaryOperator_Imag, |
6928 | /** __extension__ marker operator. */ |
6929 | CXUnaryOperator_Extension, |
6930 | /** C++ co_await operator. */ |
6931 | CXUnaryOperator_Coawait |
6932 | }; |
6933 | |
6934 | /** |
6935 | * Retrieve the spelling of a given CXUnaryOperatorKind. |
6936 | */ |
6937 | CINDEX_LINKAGE CXString |
6938 | clang_getUnaryOperatorKindSpelling(enum CXUnaryOperatorKind kind); |
6939 | |
6940 | /** |
6941 | * Retrieve the unary operator kind of this cursor. |
6942 | * |
6943 | * If this cursor is not a unary operator then returns Invalid. |
6944 | */ |
6945 | CINDEX_LINKAGE enum CXUnaryOperatorKind |
6946 | clang_getCursorUnaryOperatorKind(CXCursor cursor); |
6947 | |
6948 | /** |
6949 | * @} |
6950 | */ |
6951 | |
6952 | /** |
6953 | * @} |
6954 | */ |
6955 | |
6956 | LLVM_CLANG_C_EXTERN_C_END |
6957 | |
6958 | #endif |
6959 | |